s-class - mercedes-benz usa€¦ · s-class operator'smanual orderno.p222001313...

S-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. P222 0013 13 Part no. 222 584 94 05 Edition A 2017

É2225849405|ËÍ2225849405

S-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstra e 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RBurmester® is a registered trademark ofBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells youwhere you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

As at 01.10.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this Operator's Manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2225849405 É2225849405|ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25Introduction ........................................... 25Operation ............................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 26Protecting the environment ................... 26Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 26Operator's Manual ................................. 27Service and vehicle operation ................ 27Operating safety .................................... 29QR codes for the rescue card ................ 31Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 31Information on copyright ....................... 33

At a glance ........................................... 34Cockpit .................................................. 34Instrument cluster ................................. 35Multifunction steering wheel ................. 36Center console ...................................... 38Overhead control panel ......................... 39Door control panel ................................. 40Rear seats ............................................. 41

Safety ................................................... 42Panic alarm ............................................ 42Occupant safety .................................... 42Children in the vehicle ........................... 59Pets in the vehicle ................................. 65Driving safety systems ........................... 65Protection against theft ......................... 75

Opening and closing ........................... 77SmartKey ............................................... 77Doors ..................................................... 83Trunk ..................................................... 85Side windows ......................................... 90Panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel ...................................................... 94

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 100Correct driver's seat position .............. 100Seats ................................................... 100

Steering wheel ..................................... 115Mirrors ................................................. 117Memory function ................................. 120Memory function in the rear compart-ment .................................................... 121

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 124Exterior lighting ................................... 124Interior lighting .................................... 127Replacing bulbs ................................... 128Windshield wipers ................................ 128

Climate control ................................. 132Overview of climate control systems ... 132Operating the climate control sys-tems .................................................... 135Setting the air vents ............................ 143

Driving and parking .......................... 144Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 144Driving ................................................. 144Automatic transmission ....................... 152Refueling ............................................. 159Parking ................................................ 162Driving tips .......................................... 164Driving systems ................................... 169

On-board computer and displays .... 210Important safety notes ........................ 210Displays and operation ........................ 210Menus and submenus ......................... 214Display messages ................................ 227Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................... 258

Multimedia system ........................... 269General notes ...................................... 269Important safety notes ........................ 269Function restrictions ............................ 269Operating system ................................ 270

Stowage and features ...................... 281Stowage areas ..................................... 281Features .............................................. 290

2 Contents

Maintenance and care ...................... 312Engine compartment ........................... 312ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 318Care ..................................................... 319

Breakdown assistance ..................... 327Where will I find...? .............................. 327Flat tire ................................................ 327Battery (vehicle) .................................. 332Jump-starting ....................................... 335Towing and tow-starting ...................... 338Fuses ................................................... 340

Wheels and tires ............................... 343Important safety notes ........................ 343Operation ............................................ 343Winter operation .................................. 345Tire pressure ....................................... 346Loading the vehicle .............................. 353All about wheels and tires ................... 356Changing a wheel ................................ 362Wheel-tire combination ........................ 367

Technical data ................................... 369Information regarding technical data ... 369Vehicle electronics .............................. 369Identification plates ............................. 370Service products and filling capaci-ties ...................................................... 371Vehicle data ......................................... 376

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 18312 V socket

see Sockets115 V socket ...................................... 297360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 323Function/notes ............................. 194

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ................................ 66Warning lamp ................................. 261

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 278

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 135Activating/deactivating NightView Assist Plus

With spotlight function ................... 202Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 223Display message ............................ 247Function/information .................... 204

Active Body Control (ABC)Display message ............................ 246Function/notes ............................. 180

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 223Display message ............................ 246Function/information .................... 206

Active multicontour seat .................. 112Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 187Display message ............................ 247Exiting a parking space .................. 189

Function/notes ............................. 186Important safety notes .................. 186Parking .......................................... 188

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 70Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 182Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Display message ............................ 241Function/notes ............................. 126Switching on/off ........................... 127

Additional speedometer ................... 225Additives (engine oil) ........................ 374Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Adjusting the volumeMultimedia system ........................ 270

Air bagsBelt bags .......................................... 46Cushion air bags .............................. 50Deployment ..................................... 55Display message ............................ 239Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 49Important safety notes .................... 48Introduction ..................................... 48Knee bag .......................................... 49Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 51PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 43Side impact air bag .......................... 50Window curtain air bag .................... 50

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 143Important safety notes .................. 143Rear ............................................... 143Setting ........................................... 143Setting the center air vents ........... 143Setting the side air vents ............... 143

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 245Function/notes ............................. 182

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76

4 Index

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 76

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

ArmrestStowage compartment .................. 283

Ashtray ............................................... 294Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 221Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 221ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 318Hiding a service message .............. 318Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 318Service message ............................ 318Special service requirements ......... 318

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 76Function ........................................... 76Switching off the alarm .................... 76

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 223Display message ............................ 245Function/notes ............................. 198

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 241see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 319Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 149Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 149Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 155Automatic drive program ............... 156

Changing gear ............................... 155DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 152Display message ............................ 254Drive program display .................... 154Driving tips .................................... 155Emergency running mode .............. 159Engaging drive position .................. 153Engaging neutral ............................ 153Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 152Engaging reverse gear ................... 153Engaging the park position ............ 152Kickdown ....................................... 155Manual drive program .................... 157Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................................ 158Oil temperature (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 226Overview ........................................ 152Problem (malfunction) ................... 159Program selector button ................ 155Pulling away ................................... 148Starting the engine ........................ 147Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 156Transmission position display ........ 154Transmission positions .................. 154

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 159AUX (audio)

Notes/socket ................................ 279

BBack button ....................................... 270Backup lamp

Display message ............................ 241Bag hook ............................................ 287BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 67BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Important safety notes .................... 67Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 80Important safety notes .................... 80

Index 5

Replacing ......................................... 80Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 334Display message ............................ 243Important safety notes .................. 332Jump starting ................................. 335

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt bag ................................................ 46Blind Spot Assist

see Active Blind Spot AssistBlootooth®

Connecting a different mobilephone ............................................ 278

Bluetooth®Searching for a mobile phone ........ 277see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269Telephony ...................................... 277

Box (trunk) ......................................... 287Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 233Notes ............................................. 374

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

BrakesABS .................................................. 66Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70BAS .................................................. 66BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 67Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 374Display message ............................ 228EBD .................................................. 73High-performance brake system .... 168Hill start assist ............................... 148HOLD function ............................... 178Important safety notes .................. 166Maintenance .................................. 167Parking brake ................................ 163Riding tips ...................................... 166Warning lamp ................................. 260

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 327

see Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 36Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 211

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 27

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system ........................ 274

Calling up the climate controlmenu

Multimedia system ........................ 274Camera

see Rear view cameraCar

see VehicleCare

360° camera ................................. 323Car wash ........................................ 319Carpets .......................................... 326Display ........................................... 324Exhaust pipe .................................. 323Exterior lights ................................ 322General notes ................................ 319Interior ........................................... 324Matte finish ................................... 321Night View Assist Plus ................... 324Paint .............................................. 321Plastic trim .................................... 324Power washer ................................ 320Rear view camera .......................... 323Roof lining ...................................... 326Seat belt ........................................ 325Seat cover ..................................... 325Selector lever ................................ 325Sensors ......................................... 323Steering wheel ............................... 325Trim pieces .................................... 325Washing by hand ........................... 320Wheels ........................................... 322Windows ........................................ 322Wiper blades .................................. 322

6 Index

Wooden trim .................................. 325CD


CD player (on-board computer) ........ 218Center console

Overview .......................................... 38Stowage space .............................. 282

Center console in the rear com-partment

Stowage compartment .................. 283Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77Changing the media source ............. 218Chauffeur mode

Display message ............................ 256Fully reclined position .................... 109General notes ................................ 106Installing the head restraint ........... 108Moving front-passenger seat intothe chauffeur position .................... 106Moving the front-passenger seatinto the normal position ................. 108Removing the head restraint .......... 108

ChildRestraint system .............................. 60

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 63LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 61On the front-passenger seat ............ 63Rearward-facing restraint system .... 63Top Tether ....................................... 62

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 64Rear doors ....................................... 65

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 59

Cigarette lighter ................................ 294Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 323Climate control

Adjusting the footwell tempera-ture (multimedia system) ............... 275Automatic climate control ............. 133Controlling automatically ............... 136Cooling with air dehumidification .. 135

Cooling with air dehumidification(multimedia system) ...................... 275Defrosting the windows ................. 139Defrosting the windshield .............. 139ECO start/stop function ................ 134General notes ................................ 132Indicator lamp ................................ 136Ionization ....................................... 142Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 274Notes on using the automatic cli-mate control .................................. 134Overview ........................................ 273Overview of systems ...................... 132Perfume atomizer .......................... 141Perfume atomizer (multimediasystem) .......................................... 274Pre-entry climate control (via key)(multimedia system) ...................... 274Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time (multimedia sys-tem) ............................................... 275Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 140Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 136Rear control panel ......................... 133Refrigerant ..................................... 375Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 376Setting the air distribution ............. 138Setting the air vents ...................... 143Setting the airflow ......................... 138Setting the climate mode ............... 137Setting the climate mode (multi-media system) ............................... 274Setting the temperature ................ 137Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 140Switching on/off ........................... 135Switching residual heat on/off ...... 140Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 139Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off ........................ 138Synchronization function (multi-media system) ............................... 275

Climate control settingsMultimedia system ........................ 273

Index 7

Climate control systemClimate control .............................. 135

CockpitOverview .......................................... 34

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 222Display message ............................ 233Operation/notes .............................. 68

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 324

Combination switch .......................... 125Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 215Controller ........................................... 270Convenience box ............................... 287Convenience closing feature .............. 92Convenience opening feature ............ 92Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 316Display message ............................ 242Filling capacity ............................... 375Important safety notes .................. 374Temperature gauge ........................ 211Warning lamp ................................. 264

Coolbox .............................................. 299Cooling

see Climate controlCopyright ............................................. 33Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 241Function/notes ............................. 126

Crosswind Assist ........................... 72, 73Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 180Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........ 72, 73Cruise control

Calling up the speed last stored .... 170Cruise control lever ....................... 170Deactivating ................................... 170Display message ............................ 250Driving system ............................... 169Function/notes ............................. 169

General notes ................................ 169Important safety notes .................. 169Setting a speed .............................. 170Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 170

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 290Important safety notes .................. 290Rear compartment ......................... 291Temperature controlled ................. 292

Cushion air bags .................................. 50Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 30Customer Relations Department ....... 30

DData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 218Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 241Function/notes ............................. 124Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 225

Declarations of conformity ................. 29Diagnostics connection ...................... 30Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 25Introduction ..................................... 25

Digital speedometer ......................... 215DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 152Display

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 318Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 227Driving systems ............................. 245Engine ............................................ 242General notes ................................ 227Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 227Introduction ................................... 227Lights ............................................. 241Safety systems .............................. 228SmartKey ....................................... 257

8 Index

Tires ............................................... 252Vehicle ........................................... 254

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 266Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 69DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 172Activation conditions ..................... 172Cruise control lever ....................... 172Deactivating ................................... 176Display message ............................ 249Displays in the instrument cluster .. 175Driving tips .................................... 176Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 173Function/notes ............................. 171Important safety notes .................. 171Setting a speed .............................. 174Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 175Stopping ........................................ 174with Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot ............................................... 177

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 84Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 77Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 256Emergency locking ........................... 84Emergency unlocking ....................... 84Important safety notes .................... 83Opening (from inside) ...................... 83Power closing .................................. 84

Drinking and driving ......................... 165Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 156Manual ........................................... 157Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 158SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 226

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 319

Driving Assistance package ............. 204

Driving on flooded roads .................. 168Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 67COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 68Distance warning function ............... 69EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 73ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 71Important safety information ........... 66Overview .......................................... 65PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73STEER CONTROL ............................. 75

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 194Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 204Active Body Control ABC ............... 180Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 206Active Parking Assist ..................... 186AIRMATIC ...................................... 182ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 198Cruise control ................................ 169Display message ............................ 245DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 171DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 177Driving Assistance package ........... 204HOLD function ............................... 178Night View Assist Plus ................... 200PARKTRONIC ................................. 184Rear view camera .......................... 190Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 199

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 168Automatic transmission ................. 155Brakes ........................................... 166Break-in period .............................. 144DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176Downhill gradient ........................... 166Drinking and driving ....................... 165Driving in winter ............................. 168

Index 9

Driving on flooded roads ................ 168Driving on wet roads ...................... 168Exhaust check ............................... 165Fuel ................................................ 165General .......................................... 164Hydroplaning ................................. 168Icy road surfaces ........................... 168Important safety notes .................. 144Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 167Snow chains .................................. 345Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 166The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 144Wet road surface ........................... 167

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 219see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 116EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 117Function/notes ............................. 116

EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 287EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 230Function/notes ................................ 73

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 165On-board computer ....................... 214

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 149Automatic engine switch-off .......... 149Deactivating/activating ................. 150General information ....................... 149Important safety notes .................. 149Introduction ................................... 148

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 84

Trunk ............................................... 90Vehicle ............................................. 84

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 55

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 27

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 264Display message ............................ 242ECO start/stop function ................ 148Engine number ............................... 371Irregular running ............................ 151Jump-starting ................................. 335Starting (important safety notes) ... 146Starting problems .......................... 151Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 147Starting via smartphone ................ 147Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 147Switching off .................................. 162Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 340

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 151

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 315Additives ........................................ 374Checking the oil level ..................... 314Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 314Checking the oil level using theon-board computer ........................ 314Display message ............................ 244Filling capacity ............................... 374General notes ................................ 373Notes about oil grades ................... 373Notes on oil level/consumption .... 314Temperature (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 226

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 226Characteristics ................................. 71Deactivating/activating ................. 221Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 71

10 Index

Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ................................ 71General notes .................................. 71Important safety information ........... 71Trailer stabilization ........................... 72Warning lamp ................................. 261

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 71Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust check ................................... 165Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 323Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-age battery) ....................................... 334Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 322Setting options .............................. 124see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 117Dipping (automatic) ....................... 118Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 118Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 118Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 118Setting ........................................... 118Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 120Storing the parking position .......... 119

External audio sourceConnecting .................................... 279

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 282

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 273Features ............................................. 290Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 371Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 362MOExtended tires .......................... 328Preparing the vehicle ..................... 327TIREFIT kit ...................................... 329

Floormats ........................................... 310Folding table ...................................... 284

FrequenciesMobile phone ................................. 369Two-way radio ................................ 369

FuelAdditives ........................................ 373Consumption statistics .................. 215Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 214Displaying the range ...................... 214Driving tips .................................... 165Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Grade (gasoline) ............................ 372Important safety notes .................. 372Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Refueling ........................................ 159Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 372

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 214

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 372Problem (malfunction) ................... 161

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 340Before changing ............................. 341Dashboard fuse box ....................... 341Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 341Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 341Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 342Important safety notes .................. 340

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 310General notes ................................ 307Important safety notes .................. 308Opening/closing the garage door .. 310Problems when programming ........ 309Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 308Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 309

Gasoline ............................................. 372Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 226Genuine parts ...................................... 26

Index 11

Glove box ........................................... 282Google™ Local Search


HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader functionon/off ............................................ 272Touchpad ....................................... 272

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 126Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 109Adjusting (manually) ...................... 110Adjusting (rear) .............................. 111EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint ......................................... 110Luxury ............................................ 110Supplementary cushion ................. 111

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 224Displays and operating .................. 213Function/notes ............................. 212Important safety notes .................. 213Selecting displays .......................... 224Setting the position ....................... 224

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 127see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 125High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 126Display message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 125

Hill start assist .................................. 148HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 179Activation conditions ..................... 179Deactivating ................................... 179Display message ............................ 249Function/notes ............................. 178General notes ................................ 178

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

HoodClosing ........................................... 313Display message ............................ 256Important safety notes .................. 312Opening ......................................... 312

Horn ...................................................... 34HUD

see Head-up displayHydroplaning ..................................... 168

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 75Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 266

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 313Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 35Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 210Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 128Control ........................................... 128Manual control ............................... 128Overview ........................................ 127Reading lamp ................................. 127

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

JJack

Using ............................................. 364Jump starting (engine) ...................... 335

12 Index

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 145Start/Stop button .......................... 145

KEYLESS-GOActivating ......................................... 78Convenience closing feature ............ 92Deactivation ..................................... 78Locking ............................................ 78Start function ................................... 79Unlocking ......................................... 78

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 155

Knee bag .............................................. 49

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping AssistLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 61License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 241Light sensor (display message) ....... 241Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 126Automatic headlamp mode ............ 124Cornering light function ................. 126Fogged up headlamps .................... 127General notes ................................ 124Hazard warning lamps ................... 126High beam flasher .......................... 125High-beam headlamps ................... 125Light switch ................................... 124Low-beam headlamps .................... 125Parking lamps ................................ 125Setting exterior lighting ................. 124Standing lamps .............................. 125Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 225Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 225Turn signals ................................... 125see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 281

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 84Emergency locking ........................... 84From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 83

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 125

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 112

Luxury head restraints ..................... 110

MM+S tires ............................................ 345Magic Body Control ........................... 180MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 97Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 321MBC

see Magic Body Controlmbrace

Call priority .................................... 304Display message ............................ 233Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 304Downloading routes ....................... 307Emergency call .............................. 301General notes ................................ 300Geo fencing ................................... 307Info call button .............................. 303Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 306Remote fault diagnosis .................. 306Remote vehicle locking .................. 305Roadside Assistance button .......... 302Search & Send ............................... 304Self-test ......................................... 301Speed alert .................................... 307System .......................................... 301Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 307Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 305

Index 13

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 79General notes .................................. 79Inserting .......................................... 79Locking vehicle ................................ 84Removing ......................................... 79Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 283see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 218Memory function

In the rear compartment ................ 121Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 120Storing settings (rear compart-ment) ............................................. 121

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 194ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 66Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 204Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 206Active Parking Assist ..................... 186ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 198BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 66BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 67Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 180Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ..... 72, 73DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 171DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 177ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 71General notes ................................ 169MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 180Night View Assist Plus ................... 200PARKTRONIC ................................. 184PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 57PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 73PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 58Rear view camera .......................... 190

ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 181Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 199

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 227Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 323

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 277Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 278Frequencies ................................... 369Installation ..................................... 369Menu (on-board computer) ............ 219Transmission output (maximum) .... 369

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 79MOExtended tires .............................. 328Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 367Mounting a new wheel ................... 366Preparing the vehicle ..................... 363Raising the vehicle ......................... 364Removing a wheel .......................... 366Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 363

MP3Operation ....................................... 218see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 212

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 211Overview .......................................... 36

Multimedia systemSwitching on and off ...................... 270

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

14 Index

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 215see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Night View Assist PlusActivating/deactivating ................. 202Cleaning ......................................... 324Display message ............................ 248Function/notes ............................. 200Pedestrian and animal recogni-tion ................................................ 201Problem (malfunction) ................... 203Switching automatic activationon/off ............................................ 222

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 144

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 51Faults ............................................... 54Operation ......................................... 51System self-test ............................... 53

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 48Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 58Children in the vehicle ..................... 59Important safety notes .................... 42Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 42Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 51PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 43Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 57PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 58Restraint system warning lamp ........ 43Seat belt .......................................... 43

OCSConditions ....................................... 51

Faults ............................................... 54Operation ......................................... 51System self-test ............................... 53

Odometer ........................................... 214Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 226Assistance graphic menu ............... 221Assistance menu ........................... 221Display messages .......................... 227Displaying a service message ........ 318DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175Factory settings ............................. 226Head-up display ............................. 212Important safety notes .................. 210Instrument cluster menu ............... 225Lights menu ................................... 225Media menu ................................... 218Menu overview .............................. 214Message memory .......................... 227Navigation menu ............................ 215Operation ....................................... 211Radio menu ................................... 217Service menu ................................. 221Settings menu ............................... 221Standard display ............................ 214Telephone menu ............................ 219Trip menu ...................................... 214Video DVD operation ..................... 219

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 29Important safety notes .................... 29

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 25

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 27Vehicle equipment ........................... 27

Outside temperature display ........... 210Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 65

PPaint code number ............................ 370

Index 15

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 321Panic alarm .......................................... 42Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 94Opening/closing the roller sun-blind ................................................. 96Operating ......................................... 95Operating the roller sunblinds forthe sliding sunroof ........................... 96Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99Rain closing feature ......................... 96Resetting ......................................... 98Reversing feature ............................. 95

Parcel net hooks ............................... 288Parking

Important safety notes .................. 162Parking brake ................................ 163Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passengerside ................................................ 119Rear view camera .......................... 190Switching off the engine ................ 162see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee 360° camerasee Active Parking Assistsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONICsee Rear view camera

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying automatically ................... 163Applying or releasing manually ...... 163Display message ............................ 230Electric parking brake .................... 163Emergency braking ........................ 164General notes ................................ 163Releasing automatically ................. 164Warning lamp ................................. 263

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 125

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 185Driving system ............................... 184Function/notes ............................. 184Important safety notes .................. 184

Problem (malfunction) ................... 186Range of the sensors ..................... 184Warning display ............................. 185

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 239Indicator lamps ................................ 43Problem (malfunction) ................... 239

Perfume atomizerOperating ....................................... 141Problem (malfunction) ................... 142Setting the perfume intensity(multimedia system) ...................... 274Vial ................................................ 141

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65Phone book


Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 324Power locks ......................................... 84Power washers .................................. 320Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 234Operation ......................................... 57

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 223Display message ............................ 234Function/notes ................................ 73Important safety notes .................... 74Warning lamp ................................. 266

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 234Operation ......................................... 58

Program selector button .................. 155Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76Immobilizer ...................................... 75

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 26

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 148General notes ................................ 148Hill start assist ............................... 148

16 Index

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 31

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 30Quick access for telephone

Sending DTMF tones ...................... 272

RRadiator cover ................................... 313Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 217Radio mode


Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 29Rain closing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 96Reading lamp ..................................... 127Rear compartment

Activating/deactivating climatecontrol ........................................... 135Setting the air distribution ............. 138Setting the air vents ...................... 143Setting the airflow ......................... 138Setting the temperature ................ 137Stowage compartment .................. 283

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemAUX jacks ...................................... 280AUX jacks CD/DVD drive .............. 279

Rear seatsAdjusting ....................................... 102Adjusting a rear reclining seat ....... 102Overview .......................................... 41Setting the reclined position .......... 103

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 323Displays in the COMAND display ... 191Function/notes ............................. 190

Rear window blind ............................ 293Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 140Switching on/off ........................... 139

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 117Dipping (automatic) ....................... 118

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 375Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Important safety notes .................. 159see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 307Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 308

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 128

Reporting safety defects .................... 30Rescue card ......................................... 31Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 244Warning lamp ................................. 264

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 140Restraint system

Display message ............................ 237Introduction ..................................... 42Warning lamp ................................. 263Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof ................ 95Roller sunblinds ............................... 96Side windows ................................... 91Trunk lid ........................................... 85

ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 181Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 28Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 96Rear side windows ......................... 293Rear window .................................. 293

Roller sunblind of the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

Operating (front roller sunblind) ....... 96Operating (rear roller sunblind) ........ 97

Roof carrier ........................................ 289

Index 17

Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 326Roof load (maximum) ........................ 376Route guidance


SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD cardInserting/removing ........................ 278

SD memory cardsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269Selecting ........................................ 218

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

SeatAdjusting the front-passengerseat from the driver's seat ............. 103Adjusting the front-passengerseat from the rear .......................... 104Multicontour seat in the rear com-partment ........................................ 112

Seat belt buckle extenderDisplay message ............................ 235

Seat belt extenderFunction/notes ................................ 47

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 47Adjusting the height ......................... 46Cleaning ......................................... 325Correct usage .................................. 45Fastening ......................................... 46Important safety guidelines ............. 44Introduction ..................................... 43Releasing ......................................... 47Seat belt extender ........................... 47Warning lamp ................................. 259Warning lamp (function) ................... 47

SeatingSeating comfort package ............... 112

Seating comfort package ................. 112Seats

Active multicontour seat ................ 112Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101Adjusting (rear compartment) ........ 102Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 112Adjusting the head restraint .......... 109Calling up a stored setting (mem-ory function) .................................. 120Chauffeur mode ............................. 106Cleaning the cover ......................... 325Correct driver's seat position ........ 100Display message ............................ 256EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............. 116Important safety notes .................. 100Seat heating .................................. 112Seat heating problem .................... 114Seat ventilation .............................. 113Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 120Switching seat heating on/off ....... 112Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 113

SectionWheels and tires ............................ 343

Securing a loadsee Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 288Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 325see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 323Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 221Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 374Coolant (engine) ............................ 374Engine oil ....................................... 373Fuel ................................................ 372Important safety notes .................. 371Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 375Washer fluid ................................... 375

18 Index

Setting the date/time formatsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 226On-board computer ....................... 221

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 226Side impact air bag ............................. 50Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 241Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 322Convenience closing feature ............ 92Convenience opening feature .......... 92Important safety information ........... 90Opening/closing .............................. 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93Resetting ......................................... 93Reversing feature ............................. 91

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Skibag ................................................ 285Sliding sunroof

see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 80Changing the programming ............. 79Checking the battery ....................... 80Convenience closing feature ............ 92Convenience opening feature .......... 92Display message ............................ 257Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77Important safety notes .................... 77KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79Loss ................................................. 81Mechanical key ................................ 79Overview .......................................... 77Positions (ignition lock) ................. 145Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81Starting the engine ........................ 147

SmartphoneStarting the engine ........................ 147

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269

Snow chains ...................................... 345Sockets

Center console .............................. 296General notes ................................ 296Rear compartment ......................... 296Trunk ............................................. 297

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 270

Special seat belt retractor .................. 59Specialist workshop ............................ 30Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 225Digital ............................................ 215In the Instrument cluster ................. 35Segments ...................................... 210Selecting the display unit ............... 225

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 125

Start/Stop buttonGeneral notes ................................ 145Key positions ................................. 146Removing ....................................... 146Starting the engine ........................ 147

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 146STEER CONTROL .................................. 75Steering

Display message ............................ 257Warning lamps ............................... 268

Steering Assistsee DISTRONIC PLUS

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 250Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROL

Index 19

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ................... 115Button overview ............................... 36Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 211Cleaning ......................................... 325EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116Important safety notes .................. 115Paddle shifters ............................... 156Steering wheel heating .................. 115Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 120

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 116Switching on/off ........................... 115

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 156Stop&Go Pilot

see DISTRONIC PLUSStowage areas ................................... 281Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 283Center console .............................. 282Center console in rear compart-ment .............................................. 283Cup holders ................................... 290Door ............................................... 283Eyeglasses compartment ............... 282Glove box ....................................... 282Important safety information ......... 281Rear ............................................... 283Rear seat backrest ......................... 284Stowage net ................................... 285see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 285Stowage space

Bag hooks ...................................... 287Folding table .................................. 284Parcel net retainers ....................... 288Securing a load .............................. 288

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 289Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 345Sun visor ............................................ 292Suspension mode

Active Body Control ABC ............... 180Suspension setting

AIRMATIC ...................................... 182

Suspension settingsSETUP (on-board computer) .......... 226

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 140Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 278

TTachometer ........................................ 210Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 241Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 371Information .................................... 369Tires/wheels ................................. 367Vehicle data ................................... 376

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 220Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 277Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 277Display message ............................ 257Introduction ................................... 219Menu (on-board computer) ............ 219Number from the phone book ........ 220Redialing ........................................ 220Rejecting/ending a call ................. 220see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 269Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 278

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 211Engine oil (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 226Outside temperature ...................... 210Setting (climate control) ................ 137Transmission oil (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 226

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 349Checking manually ........................ 349Display message ............................ 252

20 Index

Maximum ....................................... 348Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 330Notes ............................................. 347Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 331Recommended ............................... 346Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 329

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 352Important safety notes .................. 352Restarting ...................................... 352

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 350Function/notes ............................. 349General notes ................................ 349Important safety notes .................. 349Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 352Restarting ...................................... 351Warning lamp ................................. 267Warning message .......................... 351

TIREFIT kitImportant safety notes .................. 329Storage location ............................ 327Tire pressure not reached .............. 330Tire pressure reached .................... 331Using ............................................. 329

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 361Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 360Bar (definition) ............................... 360Changing a wheel .......................... 362Characteristics .............................. 360Checking ........................................ 343Curb weight (definition) ................. 361Definition of terms ......................... 360Direction of rotation ...................... 363Display message ............................ 252Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 362DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 360DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 360GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 361

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 361GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 361Important safety notes .................. 343Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 361Information on driving .................... 343Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 361Labeling (overview) ........................ 357Load bearing index (definition) ...... 362Load index ..................................... 359Load index (definition) ................... 361Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 361Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 361Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 361Maximum tire load ......................... 359Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 361MOExtended tires .......................... 344Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 362PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 361Replacing ....................................... 362Service life ..................................... 344Sidewall (definition) ....................... 362Snow chains .................................. 345Speed rating (definition) ................ 361Storing ........................................... 363Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 360Summer tires in winter .................. 345Temperature .................................. 357TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 362Tire bead (definition) ...................... 362Tire pressure (definition) ................ 362Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 361Tire size (data) ............................... 367Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 357Tire tread ....................................... 344Tire tread (definition) ..................... 362Total load limit (definition) ............. 362Traction ......................................... 356

Index 21

Traction (definition) ....................... 362Tread wear ..................................... 356Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 356Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 360Wear indicator (definition) ............. 362Wheel and tire combination ........... 367Wheel rim (definition) .................... 361see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 62Touchpad

Changing the station/musictrack .............................................. 272Character suggestions ................... 271Deleting characters ....................... 272Entering a space ............................ 272Entering characters ....................... 271Gesture control .............................. 271Handwriting recognition ................ 272Operating the touchpad ................. 271Overview ........................................ 271Quick access for Audio .................. 272Quick access for telephone ........... 272Switching ....................................... 271Switching input line ....................... 272

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 340Important safety notes .................. 338

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 72

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 338Installing the towing eye ................ 339Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 340Removing the towing eye ............... 339Transporting the vehicle ................ 340With both axles on the ground ....... 339

Towing eye ......................................... 327Traffic reports


Traffic Sign AssistActivating ....................................... 200Display message ............................ 249Function/notes ............................. 199Important safety notes .................. 200

Instrument cluster display ............. 200Switching on/off ........................... 222

Transfer case ..................................... 159Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransporting the vehicle .................. 340Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 325Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 215Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 214Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 215

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 90Emergency release button ............... 90Important safety notes .................... 85Locking separately ........................... 89Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 89Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 86Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 87Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 86Power closing .................................. 84

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 255Obstacle recognition ........................ 85Opening dimensions ...................... 376Opening/closing .............................. 85

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 376Turn signals

Display message ............................ 241Switching on/off ........................... 125

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 369Installation ..................................... 369Transmission output (maximum) .... 369Windshield (infrared reflective) ...... 311

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 84

22 Index

From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 83

Upshift indicator (on-board com-puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 226USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 279

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 292Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 30Data acquisition ............................... 31Display message ............................ 254Equipment ....................................... 27Individual settings .......................... 221Limited Warranty ............................. 31Loading .......................................... 353Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77Lowering ........................................ 367Maintenance .................................... 28Operating safety .............................. 29Parking .......................................... 162Parking for a long period ................ 164Pulling away ................................... 148Raising ........................................... 364Reporting problems ......................... 30Securing from rolling away ............ 363Towing away .................................. 338Transporting .................................. 340Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77Vehicle data ................................... 376

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 376Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 370Vehicle level

Active Body Control ABC ............... 180AIRMATIC ...................................... 182Display message ............................ 245

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 327Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 219


Video-AUXConnecting an external videosource ............................................ 279

VINType plate ...................................... 370

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 261Brakes ........................................... 260Check Engine ................................. 264Coolant .......................................... 264Distance warning ........................... 266ESP® .............................................. 261ESP® OFF ....................................... 263Fuel tank ........................................ 264General notes ................................ 258Overview .......................................... 35Parking brake ................................ 263PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43Reserve fuel ................................... 264Restraint system ............................ 263Seat belt ........................................ 259Steering ......................................... 268Tire pressure monitor .................... 267

Warranty .............................................. 27Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 257Weather display (COMAND)


Wheel and tire combinationsTires ............................................... 367

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 367Wheel chock ...................................... 363Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 362Checking ........................................ 343Cleaning ......................................... 322Important safety notes .................. 343Information on driving .................... 343Interchanging/changing ................ 362Mounting a new wheel ................... 366Mounting a wheel .......................... 363Removing a wheel .......................... 366

Index 23

Snow chains .................................. 345Storing ........................................... 363Tightening torque ........................... 367Wheel size/tire size ....................... 367

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 238Operation ......................................... 50

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 139Infrared reflective .......................... 311

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 317Important safety notes .................. 375Notes ............................................. 375

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 131Replacing the wiper blades ............ 129Switching on/off ........................... 128

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 345Slippery road surfaces ................... 168Snow chains .................................. 345

Winter operationRadiator cover ............................... 313Summer tires ................................. 345

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 345

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 322Important safety notes .................. 129Replacing ....................................... 129

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 325Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

24 Index

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-hensive and specifically adapted information onyour vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters. Furtherinformation can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual in the "COMAND" sectionunder the "Character entry (telephony)" key-word.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button on the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 270).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forward/backward: turn3 thecontroller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information text or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

Digital Operator's Manual 25

Protecting the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

26 Genuine Mercedes-Benz partsIntroductio

n

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 370).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Bear in mindthat your vehicle may not feature all functionsdescribed here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equip-ment in your vehiclemay therefore differ fromthat shown in the descriptions and illustra-tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

Service and vehicle operation 27

Introductio

n

Z

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and youhave directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance Center3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceAlways bring the Maintenance Booklet with youwhen taking the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Your customer serviceadvisor will enter every service into your Main-tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100(Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty Booklet(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-ature in the vehicle so that it is available to thenext owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaWhen you are abroad with your vehicle, observethe following points:RService facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelcan cause damage to the catalytic converter.RThe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane number. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

28 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, speed bumps or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity forwirelessvehicle componentsUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Operating safety 29

Introductio

n

Z

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRtechnical data for the vehicleRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again withan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-essary, contact us at one of the followingaddresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLC3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

30 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

The following text is reproduced as required ofall manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to theNational Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information underwww.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.

Data stored in the vehicle 31

Introductio

n

Z

After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital OwnersManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened

RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by an EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

32 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Information on copyright 33

Introductio

n

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 156

; Combination switch 125

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 35

A DIRECT SELECT lever 152

B Overhead control panel 39

C Control panel for:Ü Lowering the rear seathead restraints 111u Extending/retractingthe rear window roller sun-blind 293PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-tor lamps 43Adjusting the brightness ofthe instrument lighting andthe multimedia system dis-play

D Ignition lock 145Start/Stop button 145

Function Page

E Climate control systems 132

F Adjusts the steering wheel 115Steering wheel heating 115

G Cruise control lever 170

H Electric parking brake 163

I Diagnostics connection 30

J Opens the hood 312

K Light switch 124

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot 177Switching on Active LaneKeeping Assist 206Deactivating PARKTRONIC 184Switching on the 360° cam-era 194Activating Night View Assist 200Switching on the head-updisplay 212

34 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: SpeedometerWarning and indicator lamps:! ABS 261å ESP® OFF 261÷ ESP® 261ü Seat belt 2596 Restraint system 43

; Multifunction display 212Outside temperature display 210Warning and indicator lamps:# Turn signal, left 125L Low-beam headlamps 125K High-beam headlamps 125T Parking lamps, licenseplate lamps and instrumentcluster lighting 125! Turn signal, right 125

= Tachometer 210Warning and indicator lamps:· Distance warning 266

Function Page! Electric parking brake(yellow) 263Electric parking brake (red) 263F USA only! Canada only; Check Engine 264Ð Power steering 268Brakes (red) 260$ USA onlyJ Canada onlyJ Brakes (yellow) 260

? Coolant temperature gauge 211Warning and indicator lamps:? Coolant 264

A Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:8 Reserve fuel level withfuel filler flap location indica-tor (right) 264

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Instrument cluster with mul-tifunction display 212

; Sets the brightness of theinstrument cluster and themultimedia system display 210

= Multimedia system display

? DVD changer or single DVDdrive

A Multimedia system control-ler and buttons

B ~

Rejects or ends a call 219Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Muteó

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System

Function Page

C ò

Opens the menu list9:

Selects a menu or submenuor scrolls through lists 211a

Confirms a selection 211Hides display messages 227%

Back 211ñ

Switches off the Voice Con-trol System

36 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

i Additional information can be found:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the DVD changer or single DVD drive inthe Digital Operator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 37

Ataglance

Center console

Function Page

: Ü Switches the multime-dia system on/off 270

; Adjusts the volume 270

= è ECO start/stop func-tion 150

? Touchpad 271Telephone keypad (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

A É Sets the vehicle level 182

B e Adjusts the suspensionsettings 182

C Û Selects the drive pro-gram/program selector but-ton 155Mercedes-AMG vehicles:Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram/program selector but-ton 155

Function Page

D % Back button 270

E T Seat adjustment but-ton 101

F Ø Navigation button (seeDigital Operator's Manual)

G $ Radio button (see Digi-tal Operator's Manual)

H £ Hazard warning lamps 126

I Õ Media button (see Dig-ital Operator's Manual)

J % Telephone, addressbook and Internet button;see the Digital Operator'sManual

K Ø Vehicle functions/system settings button (seeDigital Operator's Manual)

L Controller 270

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 127

; |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 128

= G SOS button 301

? c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 128

A u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 128

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 127

C ï Info call button 303

D Eyeglasses compartment 282

E 3 Operates the pano-rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 95Operates the front roller sun-blinds 96

Function Page

F µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 97Operates the rear roller sun-blind 97

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 308

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see the sep-arate operating instructions

I F Breakdown assistancecall button 302

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: s Seat ventilation 113

; c Seat heating 112

= w Adjusts the front-passenger seat from thedriver’s seat 103

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringcolumn 120

A Adjusts the seats electrically 101

B 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 117

C WOpens/closes the rightside window 90

Function Page

D W Opens/closes the rearright side window 90

E p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 89

F nOverride feature for thecontrols in the rear compart-ment 65

G Opens the door 83

H %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 83

I W Opens/closes the rearleft side window 90

J W Opens/closes the leftside window 90

40 Door control panelAt

aglance

Rear seats

i Example: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertain-ment System

Function Page

: DVD player; see the DigitalOperator's Manual

; Cigarette lighter 294Socket 296

Function Page

= Cup holder 291

? Stowage compartment in therear seat armrest 283

A Stowage box in the seatbackrest 284Coolbox 299

Rear seats 41

Ataglance

Panic alarm

X To arm: press! button: for approx-imately one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To disarm: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:Rseat belt systemRair bagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 45)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 100).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 100).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 55).For information on children traveling with you inthe vehicle and on child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59).


G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:for further information contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usedriving aids which have been approved specifi-cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

42 Occupant safetySafety

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: andPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; arepart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-onds, subsequently both indicator lamps areoff (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): thefront-passenger front air bag is able to deployin the event of an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 43) and "Air bags"(Y page 48). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

occupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rearRBelt bags for the outer seat belts in the rear,depending on the vehicle's equipment

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGObjects next to the front seat that block thebelt buckle or the moving belt anchorage onthe front seat impair the function of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices. The EmergencyTensioning Devicesmay not function as inten-ded and the seat belt may no longer providethe intended protection. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Before starting the journey, make sure thatthere are no objects around the belt buckle orbetween the front seat and door.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. An


incorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the belt bags for the outer seat beltsin the rear (Y page 46)Ralways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia

reels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm. Where possible, adjust theseat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 281).

Rear beltbagsi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 48).

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theouter rear seat belts are equipped with a beltbag. This can be seen from the BELTBAG iden-tification on the rear seat belt.

G WARNINGIn an accident, the beltbag may damage achild restraint system that is not permitted orthat has not been approved for a beltbag. As aresult, the child restraint system may not beable to provide the intended level of protec-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.For this reason, always secure a childrestraint system with an integrated seat beltwith LATCH-type (ISOFIX). On vehicles withoptional beltbags for the rear seats, only use abooster seat with an integrated backrest,which has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz in combination with a belt-bag. Never use a seat belt equipped with abeltbag to secure a forward or rearward-facing child restraint system or a non-approved booster seat. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for information onapproved child restraint systems.

Further information on child restraint systems(Y page 59).

When triggered, belt bags: open, increasingthe protected area of the occupants' ribcages.The beltbags are triggered depending on thetype and severity of the accident.

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 45).

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 100).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 47).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.


The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slidebelt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 59).

Rear seat belt buckle extendersThe seat belt extender is an integral part of thePRE-SAFE® convenience function. It is used onthe outer rear seats.Always ensure that it is possible tomove the beltbuckle freely. Always stow objects in the vehiclecorrectly.To assist you in finding the seat belt buckle andfastening the seat belt:Rthe belt buckle moves forwards to a conven-ient positionRthe belt buckle is illuminatedAfter the seat belt is fastened, the belt bucklereturns to its normal position. The seat belt thenlies tight across the lap and thorax areas.Incorporation into the PRE-SAFE®system:the belt buckle is lowered quickly in certain haz-ardous situations. This pre-tensions the seatbelt.Incorporation into the automatic measuresafter the accident: in this situation, the beltbuckle is illuminated and extended after a reardoor is opened.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can activate and deactivate the seat-beltadjustment function using the multimedia sys-tem. Information on activating and deactivatingthe seat-belt adjustment function can be foundin the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

driver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 55).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center of

the head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 43).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.


Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the systemto identify the seat as being occupied. In theevent of an accident, the restraint systems onthe front-passenger side may be triggeredand have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 43).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 51). ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isnot lit (Y page 51)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn. The driver's knee bag is alwaysdeployed along with the driver's front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occupantin the driver's seat.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the operation ofthe occupant classification system (OCS)could be adversely affected. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol-ster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. It also offers addi-tional pelvis protection for occupants in thefront seats. However, it does not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys under the following conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 55).

Cushion air bagsi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 48).

The rear reclining seat is equipped with a cush-ion air bag. If the seat backrest is reclined, thecushion air bag can provide additional occupantprotection in the event of frontal collision situa-tions. When triggered, the cushion air bagdeploys under the seat cushion. This helps pre-vent the occupant from slipping off the seatcushion.

G WARNINGIf a child restraint system is installed and theseat backrest is reclined too far backwards,the cushion air bag may deploy by mistake inthe event of an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.


When using a child restraint system, alwaysensure that the seat is correctly adjusted andthat the backrest is almost vertical.

If you install a child restraint system on the rearreclining seat, always observe:Rthe instructions and safety notes in "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 59)Rthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag is either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

RequirementsTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g. acushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length.The entire base of the child restraint systemmust always rest on the seat cushion of thefront-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as

flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, orturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul-taneously for approximately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-onds, subsequently both indicator lamps areoff (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): thefront-passenger front air bag is able to deployin the event of an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. It willthen not be deployed in the event of an acci-dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

lamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.If the status of the front-passenger front air bagchangeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bagdisplaymessage appears in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 239). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Beaware of the status of the front-passenger frontair bag both before and during the journey.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in the event of an accident. Thechild could be struck by the air bag. This posesan increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampstays off, do not install a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat.You can find more information on OCS under"Problemswith theOccupant Classification Sys-tem" (Y page 54).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelvemonths old, in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can


go out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated. The result of the classification isdependent on, among other factors, the childrestraint system and the child's stature. It isrecommended that you install the childrestraint system on a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on the resultof the classification or, alternatively, goes out.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, move the front-passenger seatas far back as possible. Alternatively, a per-son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of adult stature, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out after the system self-test. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bag isactivated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59).When the occupant classification system (OCS)is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lightup simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is deactivated in this case and does notdeploy during an accident. Have the OccupantClassification System (OCS) checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-

tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. The

entire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp displays the status of the front-passengerfront air bag (Y page 51). If the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 secondsand then goes out.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp isoff, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 54).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53).


Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/orthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rearseat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags


G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replaced

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

and to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 43)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.Vehicles with belt bags: the belt bags are alsodeployed depending on the type and severity ofthe accident.Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: the Emer-gency Tensioning Device is only triggered if thebelt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle.If the seat backrest is reclined, the cushion airbag will also be deployed depending on the typeand severity of the accident.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG indicator lamps (Y page 43).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.


The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bags on the side where theimpact takes place, independently of theEmergency Tensioning Device and the use ofthe seat belt on the driver's seat and outerseats in the second rowThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-

tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personalinjuries occurring as a result of an accident can-not be eliminated. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRvehicles with the Driving Assistance package:when a driver assistance system intervenespowerfully or the radar sensor systemdetectsan imminent danger of collision in certain sit-uations

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is inan unfavorable position.Rfor vehicles with electrically adjustable rearseats: the outer rear seats are adjusted if theyare in an unfavorable position.Rvehicleswith amulticontour seat: the air pres-sure in the side bolsters of the seat backrestis increased.Rvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seatbelts of the outer rear seats are pre-ten-sioned.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontourseats, the air pressure in the side bolsters isreduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE® PLUSintervenes.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention topull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlocked


Rthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seat-belt buckles for the outer rear seats are illu-minated and extend forwardsRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 45).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

the special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking or

sudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 281).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinformation on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.Vehicles with seat belt extenders: whensecuring a child in a child restraint system on arear seat, observe the following instructions:Rmake sure that the seat belt on the childrestraint system is fastened according to themanufacturer's installation instructions forthe child restraint system.Rfor child restraint systems with a belt clamp:engage the belt tongue in the buckle beforeyou tighten the seat belt using the belt clamp.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: wheninstalling a child restraint system, move the rearreclining seat backrest to an almost verticalposition. The rear reclining seat backrest mustrest against the child restraint system. Observethe notes on the cushion air bag (Y page 50).Vehicles with belt bags: only use a childrestraint system which has been approved byMercedes-Benz. Always observe the instruc-tions and safety notes on belt bags for the outerseat belts in the rear (Y page 46).

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; on therear seats are covered by a Velcro-fastenedupholstered lining:.X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: adjustthe rear reclining seat backrest down a little


Safety

Z

before installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system.

X Vehicles without rear reclining seat: foldupholstered lining: upwards.

X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: removeupholstered lining:.

X Vehicleswithout a rear reclining seat: turnthe support on the rear side of upholsteredlining: by 90°.Upholstered lining: remains foldedupwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings;.

X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: movethe rear reclining seat backrest to an uprightposition. The rear reclining seat backrestmust rest against the child restraint system.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

Vehicles without rear reclining seat: afteryou have removed the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, you must turn the sup-port on the rear side of upholstered lining: by90° again. Then fold upholstery lining: down.ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX)securing rings; for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system are accessible.

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.


G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.


Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. Awarning tonealso sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

The Top Tether anchorage points are installed inthe rear compartment behind the headrestraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move the head restraint up (Y page 111).X Fold up cover: of the Top Tether anchorage.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt? under the headrestraint between the two head restraint bars.

X Hook Top Tether hook= of Top Tetherbelt? into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether belt? is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether belt?. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Fold down cover: of the Top Tether anchor-age.

X If necessary, move the head restraint backdown again slightly (Y page 111). Make surethat you do not interfere with the correct rout-ing of Top Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 51).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entire base


Safety

Z

of the child restraint systemmust always rest onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.The backrest of the child restraint system mustlie as flat as possible against the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be subjected to a loadby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on thechild restraint system. The shoulder belt strapmust be routed forwards and downwards fromthe vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust thevehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seataccordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks


G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 65)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65)


G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.


Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverup in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate:press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp: is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

When the override feature is activated, the con-trols in the rear compartment are disabled for:Rthe rear side windowsRadjustment of the front-passenger seat fromthe rear compartmentRthe sunblinds:

- of the rear side windows- of the rear window- in the roof

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 66)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 66)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 67)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 68)

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 71)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 73)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 343).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 261) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 228).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.


66 Driving safety systemsSafety

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakesX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General informationBAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of acollision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 66).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles with theDriving Assistance Plus package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a camerasystem, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contours andposture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions arerestricted or no longer available. The brake sys-tem is still available with complete brake boost-ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 67).


G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garages


Safety

Z

Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speedunder20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress thebrake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. Theincrease in brake pressure will be carried out atthe last possible moment.When driving at a speedabove20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress thebrake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automaticallyraises the brake pressure to a value adapted tothe traffic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front within aspeed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-ing force, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-neously (Y page 57).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and Adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.


Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRthe vehicle is new or after a service on theCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS sys-temObserve the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 144).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivatingThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 222). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66).

The distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.

If the distance warning function detects thatthere is a risk of a collision, you will be warnedvisually and acoustically.Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning function warnsyou if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound, andthe· distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), the distance warning function canalso react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-ped or parked vehicles.

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.


Safety

Z

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously (Y page 57).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.

If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 57).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notesG WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.


ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 66).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicleswith 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, then ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 261) and display messages which may

be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 228).Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status, e.g. ifESP® was deactivated before the engine wasautomatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP®


You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.


Safety

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelSpinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 221).ESP®deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.ESP®activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationESP® trailer stabilization is not available inMercedes-AMG vehicles.If your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speedsof approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or malfunctioning.

Crosswind Assist (vehicles withoutMAGIC BODY CONTROL)

General informationVehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: informa-tion on stabilizing the vehicle in the event ofcrosswind (Y page 180).Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability ofyour vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-wind driving assistance function integrated inESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.ESP® intervenes automatically according to thedirection and intensity of the crosswinds affect-ing your vehicle.ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.


Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isswitched off or deactivated because of a mal-function.

Crosswind Assist

General informationVehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: informa-tion on stabilizing the vehicle in the event ofcrosswind (Y page 180).Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability ofyour vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross-wind driving assistance function integrated inESP® noticeably reduces these impairments.ESP® intervenes automatically according to thedirection and intensity of the crosswinds affect-ing your vehicle.ESP® intervenes with stabilizing braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isswitched off or deactivated because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.


G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 261) as well as displaymessages (Y page 230).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition tothe braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 178) and hill startassist (Y page 148).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationPRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize therisk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE®Brake has detected a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 66).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.For PRE-SAFE®Brake to assist youwhen driving,the radar sensor system and the camera systemmust be switched on and be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system and thecamera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detectobstacles that are in front of your vehicle for anextended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 74).


Safety

Z


G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify people, especially if they are moving. Inthese cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-vene. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.


Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-puter (Y page 223).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front passenger have their seatbelts fastenedRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 57).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.

The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is endedautomatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.This steering assistance is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on awet or slippery road surface when you brakeRthe vehicle starts to skid


No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is deactivatedRESP® is malfunctioningRthe steering is faultyPower steering will, however, continue to func-tion.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition offand open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

Protection against theft 75

Safety

Z

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately ten seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is stopped.

orX Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is stopped.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is stopped.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends a messageor establishes a data connection providedthat:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

76 Protection against theftSafety

SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 292). On vehicleswith the KEYLESS-GO start function, do notkeep it on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Oth-erwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g.when starting the engine using the Start/Stopbutton.A brief radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, thevehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle; F Opens/closes the trunk lid= % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks thefollowing components:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audible

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z

signal can be activated and deactivated via themultimedia system; see the Digital Operator'sManual.You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-firmation if all components were able to belocked.When the locator lighting is activated via themultimedia system, it lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey;see the Digital Operator's Manual.

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: press and hold theFbutton until the trunk lid opens.

X To open the trunk lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,press theF button on the SmartKey.When the trunk lid closes you can thenrelease the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 147).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which the han-dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the SmartKey and the correspondingdoor handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).A brief radio connection between the vehicleand the SmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, thevehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Rwhen the external door handles are touchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface:or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.Further information on the convenience clos-ing feature (Y page 92).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power, therebyconserving battery power. For the purposes ofactivation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not benearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp (Y page 80) of theSmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights uponce, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

78 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-Key in the vehicle (Y page 147).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelon your own.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the door handle on the front-passengerdoor or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until thebattery check lamp (Y page 80) flashestwice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:RLocking/unlocking the driver's door(Y page 84)RUnlocking the trunk (Y page 90)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey 79

Openingandclosing

Z

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 80).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can obtain a battery from any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 79).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

80 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 79).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey


You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary(Y page 80).

If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).


If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

SmartKey 81

Openingandclosing

Z


KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 334).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Start/Stop button. The Smart-Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.


If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Doors



Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only open therear doors from inside the vehicle if they are notsecured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). Ifthe vehicle has been locked with the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).

X To unlock and open a front door: pull doorhandle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull rear door handle.The locking knob on the rear door pops up andthe rear door unlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull rear door handleagain.The rear door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The buttons are located on bothfront doors.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehi-cle locks.If the driver's door is open, the door staysunlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 65).If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKeyor with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from theinside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).

Doors 83

Openingandclosing

Z

If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can activate and deactivate the automaticlocking mechanism via the multimedia system(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and trunk lid intotheir locks automatically even if they are onlypartly closed.X To power close a door: push the door intothe lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly pushthe trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunk lidclosed.

Locking/unlocking the driver's doorwith the mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical keyas straight as possible away from the vehicleuntil it releases.

X Release the door handle.

84 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 76).

Trunk


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid inthe multimedia system; see the Digital Opera-tor's Manual.The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 376).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 281).

Obstruction detection with reversingfeature for the trunk lidVehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture:The trunk lid is equipped with automaticobstruction detectionwith a reversing feature. Ifa solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lidwhen automatically opening or closing, this pro-cedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stoppedduring the closing procedure, it will open againautomatically. The automatic obstruction detec-tion with reversing feature is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attentiveness when open-ing and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not respond:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some-one being trapped in these situations in par-ticular. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Trunk 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:It is also possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under the rearbumper.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.orX Pull handle:.The trunk lid opens.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture or power closing:

X Lightly push the trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunk lidclosed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 78).If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked. It thenopens again.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.

86 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.


The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 376).

Opening automaticallyYou can open the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.X Press and hold theF button on the Smart-Key until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Closing automaticallyYou can close the trunk lid automatically usingthe SmartKey or the closing button in the trunklid.

X Press closing button: on the trunk lid.orX If the SmartKey is located in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle: press theF buttonon the SmartKey.You can release the button as soon as thetrunk lid starts to close.

X To stop the closing process:RPress theF button on the SmartKey.RPull the handle in the trunk lid.RPress closing button: or locking but-ton; on the trunk lid.

RPress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.RIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:kick into the sensor detection range underthe bumper with your foot.i If theF button on the SmartKey ispressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initiatedafter the closing process is stopped, the trunklid opens.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture and KEYLESS-GO: when all the doors areclosed, you can simultaneously close the trunklid and lock the vehicle. The SmartKey must belocated to the rear of the vehicle.X Press and release locking button; on thetrunk lid.If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside thevehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehiclelocks.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk,the trunk lid opens again after it is closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS


G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-tional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft(3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,you can open or close the trunk lid or stop theprocedure without using your hands. This is use-

Trunk 87

Openingandclosing

Z

ful if you have your hands full. To do this, makea kickingmovement under the bumperwith yourfoot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.RWhen making the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clearanceto the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwiselose your balance, for example on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kickingmovement within the detection range of sen-sors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Other-wise, the sensors may not function correctly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lidcould thus be opened or closed unintention-ally, for example, if you:- sit on the edge of the trunk.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson in these situations or in situations sim-ilar to these. This will prevent unintentionalopening or closing of the trunk lid.

Operation

X To open or close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.A warning tonewill soundwhile the trunk lid isopening or closing.

X If the trunk lid doesnot openor closeafterseveral attempts: wait at least ten secondsthen move your leg under the bumper onceagain.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the trunk lid does not open or close.Repeat the leg movement more quickly if thisoccurs.To stop the opening or closing procedure, youhave the following options:RKick with your foot in sensor detectionrange: under the bumper.RPress the closing button on the trunk lid.RPull the handle on the outside of the trunk lid.RPress theF button on the SmartKeyIf the trunk lid closing procedure has been stop-ped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close

88 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing automatically frominside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addi-tion, people may be standing in the closingarea or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-dren, during the closing procedure. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Release the remote operating switch imme-diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-open the trunk lid, pull on the remote operat-ing switch.





Opening and closing

X To open: pull the remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press and hold remote operatingswitch: for the trunk lid until the trunk lid iscompletely closed.

When the vehicle is stationary, you can close thetrunk lid from the driver's seat.When the vehicleis also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lidfrom inside.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remainslocked and cannot be opened.

X To activate: close the trunk lid.X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkremains locked.i You can also lock the glove box(Y page 282).

Trunk 89

Openingandclosing

Z

X To deactivate: open the glove box.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunkwill also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk using themechanical key

General notesUse the mechanical key if the trunk lid can nolonger be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKeyRusing HANDS-FREE ACCESSRusing the remote operating switch in the doorcontrol panel



UnlockingX Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-tion2.The trunk lid is released.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1and remove it.

Unlocking the trunk from the insideusing the emergency release button

You can unlock the trunk lid from the insideusing emergency release button:.X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked using emergencyrelease button: when stationary or when thevehicle is in motion.Emergency release button: does not unlockthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Emergency release button: flashes:Rfor 30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRfor 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.

90 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window from travelingupwards during the automatic closing process,the sidewindowopens again automatically. Dur-ing themanual closing process, the side windowonly opens again automatically after the corre-sponding switch is released.The automatic reversing feature is only an aidand does not relieve you of the responsibility ofpaying attention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding button.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the corre-sponding button.

X To close fully: pull the corresponding buttonbeyond the point of resistance.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. You canstop automatic operation by pressing/pullingthe switch again.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 65).

Side windows 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Before opening or closing the side windows, acheck is carried out to see whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle. The check is carriedout if you use the start/stop button instead of aSmartKey in the ignition and you press or pull abutton while the engine is switched off. This iscarried out by means of a brief radio connectionbetween the vehicle and the SmartKey.Information on opening and closing the rollersunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 293).

Convenience opening

General notesIf the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-cle, the convenience opening function is availa-ble.You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out thefollowing functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel and the roller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until the sidewindows and the panorama sunroof are in thedesired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Keep the% button pressed until the pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is inthe desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature


G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close the rollersunblinds.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 91)Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel (Y page 95)Rthe roller sunblinds (Y page 96)

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.

X On vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: press and hold the& button again until the roller sunblinds ofthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Allthe doors must be closed.

92 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelare closed.

X Vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: touch recessedsensor surface: on the door handle againuntil the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 91).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 91).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Side windows 93

Openingandclosing

Z


A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypush the sliding sunroof switch up or pull itback. The sliding sunroof raises at the rear.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

! When the sliding sunroof is open, water canget into the vehicle and cause damage. The

94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

vehicle electronics can be damaged if waterenters the vehicle interior. Only clean the slid-ing sunroof when it is closed.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side windowslightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your attentionwhen closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it low-ers slightly automatically at higher speeds. Thenoise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as aresult.At low speeds it raises again automatically.You can also temporarily deactivate automaticlowering. To do so, press the3 switch. Thesliding sunroof raises again automatically.You can continue to operate the sliding sunroofafter switching off the engine or removing theSmartKey from the ignition lock. This functionremains active for five minutes or until you opena front door.The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roofcarrier is installed. In order to allow ventilationof the vehicle interior, you can raise the slidingsunroof.If contact is made with a roof carrier approvedby Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowersslightly but remains raised at the rear.Before opening, raising or closing the slidingsunroof, a check is carried out to see whether avalid SmartKey is in the vehicle, if:Rthe3 switch is pressed or pulled

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 95

Openingandclosing

Z

andRthe Start/Stop button is used instead of theSmartKey in the ignition lockandRthe engine is not runningThis is carried out by means of a brief radio con-nection between the vehicle and the SmartKey.

Rain-closing featureThe raised sliding sunroof automatically lowersat the rear when driving if it starts to rain. Thesliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rainYou can manually cancel the automatic closingprocedure. Press or pull the3 switch in anydirection.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:. The rain-closingfeature remains activated.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedbetween the roller sunblind and frame or slid-ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-ing. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing, make sure that nobody parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-blind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The front roller sunblind can onlybe opened and closed when the sliding sunroofis closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a roller sunblind during the closingprocess, the roller sunblind opens again auto-matically. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-tion when closing the roller sunblinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react in par-ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers. This means that the reversing featurecannot prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.When closing the roller sunblind, make surethat no body parts are in the sweep area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Openingandclosing the front roller sun-blind

The front roller sunblind can only be closedwhen the sliding sunroof is closed.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the3 switch in direction:.The front roller sunblind opens, then the slid-ing roof is raised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.The front roller sunblind opens.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=.


eningandclosing

The front roller sunblind closes if the slidingsunroof is closed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation is star-ted in the corresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by pressing or pullingagain.

Opening and closing the rear roller sun-blind

Operating from the front

Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL: youcan operate the rear roller sunblind from thefront.X To open or close: press button:.The rear roller sunblind opens or closes fully.

X To stop: press button: again.You must first open or close the rear roller sun-blind fully before you can move it in the otherdirection.

Operating from the rear compartment

X To open/close manually: press or pullswitch: to the point of resistance and hold

it until the rear roller sunblind has reached thedesired position.

X To open/close fully: press or pull switch:beyond the point of resistance and release it.

If you press switch: again when the rear rollersunblind is fully opened, the degree of transpar-ency of the rear MAGIC SKY CONTROL elementchanges. If you pull switch: again when therear roller sunblind is fully closed, the degree oftransparency changes only when the roller sun-blind is opened (Y page 97).If the rear roller sunblind closes when the rearMAGIC SKYCONTROL element is not tinted, thistints automatically.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a panorama roof, thetransparency of which can be changed by apply-ing electrical voltage.MAGIC SKYCONTROL can be switched betweendarkened and transparent states.MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automaticallyafter a short period when you turn the SmartKeyto position 0 or remove the SmartKey.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the headliner is damaged orremoved, electrical components will beexposed. If you touch these components, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk offatal injury.RNever remove the headliner.RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-TROL carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKYCONTROL are protected behind the headliner.These are in the hidden portion of the movableroof element of the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel and above the left rear door.


Openingandclosing

Z

The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage transformeris stamped with a high-voltage symbol, warningyou about the high voltage. The electric cablesof the high-voltage section are color orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL fromthe front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the statusit was set to before the engine was switchedoff.

X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.

If the rear MAGIC SKY CONTROL element is in adifferent state than the front element, thedegree of transparency will change only in thefront element. Both elements will then be in thesame state and any further changes will againoccur synchronously.At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slowerand uneven. The entire process may take sometime.

Operating the rear MAGIC SKY CON-TROL element from the rear

X To change the degree of transparencywhen the roller sunblind is fully opened:press switch:.

X To change the degree of transparencywhen the roller sunblind is fully closed:pull switch:.The degree of transparency will change onlyafter the roller sunblind is opened.

If the rear roller sunblind closes when the rearMAGIC SKYCONTROL element is not tinted, thistints automatically.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblind

Resetting the sliding sunroof or thefront roller sunblinds

Reset the sliding sunroof or the front roller sun-blind if the sliding sunroof or the front rollersunblind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch to the point of resistancein the direction of arrow: until the slidingsunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Pull the3 switch in the direction ofarrow: until the front roller sunblind isclosed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof and thefront roller sunblind can be fully openedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.


eningandclosing

Resetting the rear sunblind X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull switch: repeatedly until the rear rollersunblind is fully closed.

X Keep switch: pulled for an additional sec-ond.

X Make sure that the rear roller sunblind can beopened fully again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact aqualified specialist workshop.


The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-ture.


Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:RAdjusting the seat electrically (Y page 101).RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 115).RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 46).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 117).RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-ror and head-up display settings with thememory function (Y page 120).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats

Vehicles with standard head restraintsor luxury head restraints

: Head restraint height; Head restraint height= Seat height

Seats 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi-tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-tion (Y page 57).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 120).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seatsettings, certain seat adjustment functionswill also adjust other settings at the sametime.

i The head restraint height is adjusted auto-matically when you adjust the seat height orthe seat fore-and-aft position.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxuryhead restraint

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Seat height? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will bemoved to a better posi-tion if it was previously in an unfavorable posi-tion (Y page 57).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 120).

i To ensure the largest possible range of seatsettings, certain seat adjustment functions

will also adjust other settings at the sametime.

i The head restraint height is adjusted auto-matically when you adjust the seat height orthe seat fore-and-aft position.

i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically when youadjust the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seat


: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and lengthA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthYou can only adjust the outer seats in the rearelectrically.

Adjusting a rear reclining seat

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and length


gwheelandmirrors

A Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Legrest angleC Legrest lengthThe rear reclining seat is only available in longwheelbase vehicles equipped with "executiveseats". On vehicles without a rear reclining seat,the button for setting the angle and length of thelegrest has no function.Vehicles with a long wheelbase: depending onthe vehicle equipment, the rear reclining seat iseither only on the front-passenger side or alsoon the driver's side.Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the rear recliningseats are on the driver's and the front-passenger side.Vehicles with a long wheelbase and equippedwith a "Rear compartment chauffeur/memorypackage" also have a footrest. This is located onthe lower part of the front-passenger seat back-rest (Y page 104).The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is thecase fold up the legrest and engage it.

Setting the reclined position

This function is only available for longwheelbasevehicles.You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 65).The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the rear seat can be movedto the reclined position (Y page 146).X Press and hold button: until the seat hasreached the reclined position.The rear seat moves into the reclined posi-tion, the front-passenger seat moves into thechauffeur position (Y page 106) and the foot-rest moves out from under the front-passenger seat.

You can exit the reclined position and adjustthe seat position by:Rpressing button:Rcalling up a stored position using memorybutton 1 or 2 (Y page 121)Rmanually adjusting the seat to the desiredposition (Y page 101)i The steps for setting the reclined positionare not always carried out simultaneously.

The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this is thecase fold up the legrest and engage it.

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the driver’s seat



Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 59).

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.


Seats 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fullyforwards if there are objects in the parcel netin the front-passenger footwell. The objectscould otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button: lights up,for the front-passenger seat you can adjust:Radjust the seat (Y page 101)Rseat heating (Y page 112)Rseat ventilation (Y page 113)Rthe memory function to call up or save set-tings (Y page 120).

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the rear



The seats can still be adjusted when the powersupply is switched off.


Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 48) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 59).

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

! Do not move the front-passenger seat fullyforwards if there are objects in the parcel netin the front-passenger footwell. The objectscould otherwise be damaged.

i You can use the rear-compartment overridebutton to disable the setting of the front-passenger seat from the rear (Y page 65).


: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and length


gwheelandmirrors

X To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the but-ton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toB.


: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Backrest angle? Seat heightA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentThe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toA.

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur modeand long wheelbase


: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthC Longitudinal direction of the legrest if rear

reclining seat is installedD Angle of the legrest if rear reclining seat is

installedX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in the but-ton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toD.


: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Seats 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

B Seat heightC FootrestThe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toC.

The footrest can only be adjusted if:Rthe front-passenger seat is moved fullyforwardRthe front-passenger seat is in the position forchauffeur mode (Y page 106).

i The front-passenger seat in the Mercedes-Maybach must not be positioned fully for-wards when adjusting the footrest. The front-passenger seatmust bemoved forwards fromthe rear to the middle adjustment range.

Chauffeur mode


G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is in chauffeurmode and the front-passenger head restraintis folded down, the view of the passenger-side

exterior mirror can be impaired. There is a riskof an accident.To have a free view of the exterior mirror,remove the front-passenger head restraint.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

General notesIn chauffeur mode:Rthe front-passenger seat is moved forwardsRthe backrest is tilted forwardsRthe head restraint is folded forwardsThe front-passenger seat automatically movesfrom the chauffeur position back into the normalposition if:Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted using theseat adjustment switch on the front-passenger doorRthe front-passenger seat belt is fastenedRan occupant is detected on the front-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat head restraint isinserted and the ignition is switched onRthe front-passenger seat backrest is movedbackwards or the seat is moved in a longitu-dinal direction out of the chauffeur area(Y page 108)

Positioning the front-passenger seat forchauffeur mode

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 106). Adjust the seat for chauffeurmode before the journey. Do not remove thefront-passenger seat head restraint during thejourney.


gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 65).In order for the front-passenger seat to be posi-tioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on (Y page 146)Rthe front-passenger seatmay not be occupiedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forwards and hold it in thisposition.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the area forchauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeurmode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forward. The seat moves forward.The To view the ext. mirror, adjustfront-passenger seat or remove thehead restraint. message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 256).i If the front-passenger seat is already at thethreshold to the area for the chauffeur mode,the position for the chauffeur mode is setimmediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode can besaved or set using thememory function of therear seat (Y page 121). For this the indicatorlamp on button: must be lit.

Adjusting from the driver's seat

In order for the front-passenger seat to be posi-tioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on (Y page 146)Rthe front-passenger seatmay not be occupiedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forwards and hold it in thisposition.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the area forchauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until the front-passenger seat is in position for chauffeurmode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forward. The seat moves forward.The To view the ext. mirror, adjustfront-passenger seat or remove thehead restraint. message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 256).i If the front-passenger seat is already at thethreshold to the area for the chauffeur mode,the position for the chauffeur mode is setimmediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode cannot bestored or set with the driver's seat memoryfunction.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Installing/removing the head restraint

Removing

X Move the seat into the position for chauffeurmode, until the head restraint folds forwardcompletely (Y page 106).

X Fold head restraint bar covers; backwards.X Pull adjuster lever? backwards and hold it inthis position. Hold head restraint: whiledoing so.

X Remove head restraint:.X Release adjuster lever?.Red pin= protrudes from the adjuster lever.

X Press down red pin=.X Fold covers; forwards and close them.

Installing

X Fold covers; backwards.X Pull handle? backwards.Red pin= protrudes from the adjuster lever.

X Insert head restraint: into the brackets.The head restraint must engage on bothsides.

X Press down red pin=.If the pin can be pressed down and is then nolonger visible, the head restraint has engagedcorrectly.

X Fold covers; forwards and close them.The head restraint folds into position auto-matically.

Moving the front-passenger seat intothe normal position

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disable thisfunction (Y page 65).The head restraint must be installed, in order forthe front-passenger seat to be moved into thenormal position (Y page 108).The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it in thisposition.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold to thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.


gwheelandmirrors

i Further settings are available via the mem-ory function buttons, if:Ra position in the normal setting has alreadybeen savedRthe front-passenger seat has been selectedwith button:

Adjusting from the driver's seat

The head restraint must be installed, in order forthe front-passenger seat to be moved into thenormal position (Y page 108).The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To select the front-passenger seat: pressbutton: repeatedly until the indicator lampin the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it in thisposition.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold to thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.

i Further settings are available via the mem-ory function buttons if the front-passengerseat has been selected via button:.

Adjusting from the front-passenger seatX Press any seat adjustment button.The front-passenger seat moves into the nor-mal adjustment range at the threshold of thearea for chauffeur mode. The head restraintfolds into position.

Fully reclined position of the front-passenger seat

SettingThis function is only available on vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.You can move the front-passenger seat into afully reclined position. The rear seat and front-passenger seat then provide a continuous sur-face. The rear-seat passenger can use the front-passenger seat backrest as a legrest.To do so:Rmove the seat cushion of the rear seat as farback as possible in a longitudinal direction(Y page 102)Rmove the front-passenger seat into positionfor chauffeur mode (Y page 106)Rremove the front-passenger head restraint(Y page 108)Rmove the front-passenger seat so that thebackrest is in a fully reclined position(Y page 101)

ExitingTo exit the fully reclined position:Rfold the backrest upright to a suitable positionRinstall the front-passenger head restraint(Y page 108)

Adjusting the head restraints


G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.Pay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 100).

Adjusting the front head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back of theseat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow until itengages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and hold therelease catch:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint is engaged.

Adjusting the luxury head restraintmechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right- and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position for-wards: pull the head restraint forwards in thedirection of arrow; until it engages in thedesired position.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position back-wards: press and hold release catch=.

X Fold the head restraint backwards in thedirection of arrow;.

X Let go of release button= once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint is engaged.

Adjusting the EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint mechanically


gwheelandmirrors

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically when youadjust the seat backrest angle using the seatswitch.

Adjusting the front head restraints elec-tricallyThe height and fore-and-aft position of the fronthead restraints can be adjusted with the seatadjustment switch (Y page 101).

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Lowering the rear seat head restraintselectrically from the front

X Switch on the power supply or the ignition(Y page 146).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.i If all of the rear seat head restraints are low-ered and button: is pressed again, the outerrear head restraints move into the last storedposition.

Extending the outer rear seat headrestraints from the front electricallyThis function is available on vehicles with elec-trically adjustable rear seats.X Switch on the power supply or the ignition(Y page 146).

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraints have extended upwards.

Extending the outer rear head restraintsinto the last stored positionThis function is available on vehicles with elec-trically adjustable rear seats.X Switch on the power supply or the ignition(Y page 146).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.

X Briefly press button: again.The head restraints move to the last storedposition.

Adjusting the luxury head restraint in therear compartment mechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:push or pull the head restraint in the directionof arrow;.

Adjusting the rear head restraints electri-callyThe height and fore-and-aft position of the rearhead restraints can be adjusted with the seatadjustment switch (Y page 102).

Supplementary cushion for luxury headrestraintsThe supplementary cushion is available on vehi-cles with electrically adjustable rear seats.Only use the supplementary cushion when thevehicle is stationary.

Seats 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The supplementary cushion is in the vehicle.The supplementary cushion is attached to thehead restraint by three press studs.Attaching the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwards aspossible (Y page 102).

X Hold supplementary cushion; against thehead restraint and push press studs: intothe counterpieces.

Removing the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwards aspossible (Y page 102).

X Release press studs: and remove supple-mentary cushion;.

Adjusting the rear center headrestraints

Retracting and extending electrically

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraint has fully extended or retracted.

Folding into position mechanically

X Pull the head restraint up until it engages.

Adjusting the active multicontourseatYou can adjust the active multicontour seats forthe driver and front passenger via the multime-dia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.The driving dynamics settings are only activatedif:Rthe seat is occupiedRthe seat belt is fastened

Adjusting the active multicontourseat in the rear compartmentYou can adjust the multicontour seats for theouter seats in the rear using the remote control;see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the 4-way lumbar support via themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons with


gwheelandmirrors

limited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Comfortpackage: the armrest in the door and the centerconsole can also be heated when you switch onthe seat heating of one of the front seats. Youcan set this via the multimedia system; see theDigital Operator's Manual.The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.Vehicles with the Seat Heating Plus package:you can set the distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrest via themultimedia system; see the Digital Operator'sManual.Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Systemand electric seat adjustment: you can set thedistribution of the heated sections of the seatcushions and backrests on the rear seats via theRear Seat Entertainment System; see the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Front seats


X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Rear seats


X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Front seats

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the blower setting you have selected.

Seats 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z


X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid-ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"feature (Y page 92). The seat ventilation ofthe driver's seat automatically switches to thehighest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Rear seat

Switching the seat ventilation in the rear com-partment on/offX Switch on the power supply or the ignition(Y page 146).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Problems with the seat heating/ventilation


The seat heating or seatventilation has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation can be switched back on manually.


gwheelandmirrors

Steering wheel



G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: Adjusts the steering wheel height; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 116)RStoring settings (Y page 120)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Switch on the ignition (Y page 146).X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheelheating is deactivated.

Steering wheel 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating


The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If there is a risk of becoming trapped byRthe steering wheel: move the steeringwheel adjustment lever.Rthe seat: press the switch for seat adjust-ment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

You can stop the adjustment process by press-ing one of the memory function's position but-tons. This function is only available on vehicleswith memory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys-tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steeringwheel tilts upwards and the driver'sseat moves backwards if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith the start/stop button: open the driv-er's door; the ignition must be switched offRwith the SmartKey:open the driver's door;the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock (Y page 145)

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards andthe driver's seat only moves backwards if thedriving position is stored after the seat orsteering column has been adjusted.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat isstored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 120).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop. Thedriver's seat only moves backwards if it is notalready in the rearmost position.

116 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat for drivingThe steering wheel and the driver's seat aremoved to the previously set position if:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert theSmartKey into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the ignitionis switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once

i The steeringwheel and the driver's seat onlyreturn to the last set position if the drivingposition is stored after the seat or steeringcolumn has been adjusted.

The last position of the steering wheel or seat isstored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is storedwith thememory function(Y page 120).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwards when the driver's door is openedor the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in themultimedia system (see the sep-arate Operator's Manual).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare lever: for-wards or back.

Exterior mirrors



G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors


X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:press button;.Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-ton=.The indicator lamp lights up in the button thathas been pressed.

Mirrors 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selected exteriormirror using button: as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press button: up, down, or to the left orright until you have adjusted the exterior mir-ror to the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically


X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you activate the Automatic Mir‐ror Folding in the multimedia system.X Switch on the power supply or the ignition(Y page 146).

X Press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyWhen the Automatic Mirror Folding func-tion is activated in the multimedia system (seeDigital Operator's Manual):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Press and hold button: until you hear a clickand the mirror engages audibly into position(Y page 118).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 117).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.

118 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The exterior mirror on the driver's side and therear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glaremode if:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror such that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.You can store this position.

Storing using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Button for the exterior mirror setting= Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror? Button for the driver's side exterior mirrorX Start the engine.X Press button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the default parking position.

X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving positionafter approximately 10 seconds.

Saving using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged during the process.X Switch on the ignition (Y page 146).X Press button=.X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror toa position that allows you to see the rearwheel and the curb.

X Press memory button M: and one of thearrows on button; within three seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Switch on the ignition (Y page 146).X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disengagedreverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Mirrors 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Memory function


G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time,even if the power supply is switched off.

Storing settingsThememory function is only available in vehicleswith the memory package.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.

The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat, backrest, head restraint position andcontour of the backrest in the lumbar regionRactive multicontour seat: side bolsters of thebackrest, shoulder of the backrest, contour ofthe backrest, dynamic function levelRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrestRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sidesRposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 101).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 115) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 117).

X Pressmemory buttonM and then press one ofthe memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant memory positionbutton 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo-nents are in the saved position:RSeatRSteering wheelRExterior mirrorsRHead-up Displayi If you release the storage position button,the seat, steering wheel and mirror settingfunctions stop immediately. Adjustment ofthe activemulticontour seat or the 4-way lum-bar support is still carried out.

120 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Memory function in the rear compart-ment


G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

General notesThe settings for the rear seat and the front-passenger seat can be stored using the rear-compartment memory function.RIf the indicator lamp in thev button is notlit, store the rear seat settings.RIf the indicator lamp in thev button lightsup, store the front-passenger seat and rearseat settings. Both the front-passenger andrear seat are taken into account with this set-ting. Depending on the equipment in the vehi-cle, two or three memory positions can bestored for the front-passenger and rear seats.

Storing settings

General notesWith the memory function in the rear, you canstore up to three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.

The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRactive multicontour seat: the seat cushions ofthe backrest as well as the contour of thebackrest in the lumbar and shoulder regionsRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrest if theindicator lamp in thev button is not lit

The following settings are also stored to a mem-ory position, if the indicator lamp in thevbutton is lit:Rposition of the footrest for the front-passenger seat, if availableRposition of the screen, if available

Vehicles without rear reclining seat

The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).Selects rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 102).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Memory function in the rear compartment 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Selecting the front-passenger seat and rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.


X Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly(Y page 104).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat

The power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).Selects rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.


X Press the M memory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Selecting the front-passenger seat and rear-compartment seatX Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.


X Press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly(Y page 104).

X Press the M memory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

You cannot store any settings on the button forsetting the reclined position.

Calling up a stored setting

General notesThe memory positions in the area for the chauf-feur mode can only be set when the conditionsfor the chauffeur mode are fulfilled(Y page 106).

Vehicles without rear reclining seatThe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To call up the stored rear seat setting:press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passenger seatand rear seat settings: press thev but-ton repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton1,2 or3 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat are in the stored position.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button. Theadjustment of the active multicontour seat isstill carried out.

122 Memory function in the rear compartmentSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Vehicles with a rear reclining seatThe power supply or the ignition must beswitched on so that the front-passenger seatcan be selected (Y page 146).X To call up the stored rear seat setting:press thev button repeatedly until theindicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passenger seatand rear seat settings: press thev but-ton repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1 or 2 until the rear seat or the front-passenger seat is in the stored position.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button. Theadjustment of the active multicontour seat isstill carried out.

Memory function in the rear compartment 123

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Exterior lighting

General notesUSA only: if you wish to drive during the daytimewithout lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐ning Lights function via the on-board com-puter (Y page 225).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switch (Y page 124)Rthe combination switch (Y page 125)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 225)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting.The light setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambient light,but not in the event of poor visibility due toweather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignitionlock, the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light.RUSA only: if you have switched on the Day‐time Running Lights function via the on-board computer, and the engine is running,the daytime running lamps or the parkinglamps and low-beam headlamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on theambient light.RCanada only: depending on the ambient light,the daytime running lamps or the parking andlow-beam headlamps are switched on/offautomatically when the engine is running.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theÃ position.

USA only: The daytime running lamps improvethe visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here,the Daytime Running Lights function mustbe switched on via the on-board computer(Y page 225).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.Canada only: The daytime running lampsimprove the visibility of your vehicle during theday. The daytime running lamps function isrequired by law in Canada. It cannot thereforebe deactivated.

124 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adriving position to P, the daytime running lampsand low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to the T position, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and in awell litarea, in accordance with the relevant legalstipulations. Avoid using the T parkinglamps over a period of several hours. If pos-sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on the parking lamps: turn thelight switch to the T position.The green T indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock orremove the SmartKey.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side ofthe vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in direc-tion of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the high-beam head-lamps are switched on onlywhen it is dark andthe engine is running.

Exterior lighting 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus:If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, itautomatically controls activation and deactiva-tion of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 126).X High-beam flasher: pull the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch the hazard warning lamps on oroff: press button:.The turn signal lamps flash when the hazardwarning lamps are switched on. If you nowswitch on a turn signal lamp using the com-bination switch, only the turn signal lamp onthe corresponding side of the vehicle willflash.

The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-cally if an air bag is deployed.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.

Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notesWith Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you canautomatically switch between low-beam, partialhigh-beam and high-beam headlamps.Partial high-beam is a form of illuminationwhereby the high-beam is directed past otherroad users. Other road users are kept out of thehigh-beam. This prevents glare. When there is avehicle in front, for example, the high-beamheadlamps illuminate the areas to its right andleft. The vehicle in front is illuminated by the low-beam headlamps.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.If the reflected light from the high-beam head-lamps or partial high-beamheadlamps from traf-fic signs is too strong, the lights are automati-cally dimmed. Glare for the driver caused by thereflections is thus avoided.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.


G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist Plus does not reactto road users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus may not react to road users who do havelights, or may recognize them too late. In this,

126 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

or in similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated orwill be activated regardless. There is a risk ofan accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf-fic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus on/offX To switch on: turn the light switch to theÃ position.

X Press the combination switch forwardsbeyond the pressure point (Y page 125).The _ indicator lamp on the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers are detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. TheK indicator lamp on theinstrument cluster also lights up.If other road users are detected, the partialhigh-beam headlamps are automaticallyswitched on.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads areadequately illuminated:The partial high-beam or high-beam head-lamps are switched off automatically. TheK indicator lampon the instrument cluster

goes out. The _ indicator lamp on themultifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off:move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp on the multifunctiondisplay goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Left-hand front reading lamp; | Automatic interior lighting control= c Front interior lighting? u Rear interior lightingA p Right-hand front reading lamp

Interior lighting 127


Z

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

Switching on, on the corresponding vehicle side:X Press button;.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamp lightup.

Switching off, on the corresponding vehicleside:X Press button; once.The make-up lamp goes out.

X Press button; twice.Reading lamp: goes out.

Switching on, on both vehicle sides:X Press button=.The reading lamps: and the make-up lampsgo on.

Switching off, on both vehicle sides:X Press button=.Reading lamps: and the make-up lamps goout.

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position 2 inthe ignition lock.The color, brightness, zone and display light forthe ambient lighting are set using the multime-dia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual.The interior lighting control can be operatedusing the front overhead control panel.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on or off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted viathe multimedia system (see Digital Operator'sManual).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on oroff: press the c button.

X To switch the rear compartment interiorlighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamp on or off: pressthe p button.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the LED light sources of your vehicleyourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialist knowl-edge and tools to carry out the work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.

128 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î Wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Å or Ä position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than in theÄ position, causing the windshield wiper towipe more frequently.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL:If you push and hold the combination switchbeyond the point of resistance in direction ofarrowB, the manual wash program is activa-ted. If you push and hold the combination switch

briefly beyond the point of resistance in direc-tion of arrowB, the automatic wash program isactivated.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiper armsvertically before folding them away from thewindshield. By doing so, you will avoid dam-age to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades (standardwindshield wipers)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the ° positionon the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

Windshield wipers 129


Z

X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position the new wiper blade: withrecessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades (MAGICVISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the ° positionon the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly untilthe windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood,press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

X To bring the wiper blade into the removalposition: hold onto the wiper arm with onehand. With the other hand, turn the wiperblade in the direction of arrow: beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade engages in the removal posi-tion with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly pressrelease knob; and pull the wiper bladeupwards=.

130 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Installing the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade in the direction ofarrow: onto the wiper arm until tab;engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removal posi-tion in the direction of arrow= beyond thepoint of resistance.The wiper blade disengages with an audibleclick and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Vehicles without MAGICVISION CONTROL: thewindshield washer fluidfrom the spray nozzlesno longer hits the centerof the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers 131


Z

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andair humidity in the vehicle interior. The air filtercleans the air, thus improving the interior cli-mate.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis available only when the engine is running.Optimum climate control is only achieved withthe side windows and roof closed.If you start the engine using your smartphone,the last selected climate control setting is reac-tivated (Y page 147).The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 140).To enable the air conditioning, pollutant moni-toring and air filtering systems to function cor-rectly, an interior filter must be used at all times.Ensure that the filter is properly installed andthat the filter housing in the engine compart-ment is correctly and tightly sealed by the cover

at all times during operation. Use filters thathave been recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz. Always have service work car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.The integrated filter filters out most particles ofdust and soot and completely filters out pollen.It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. Aclogged filter reduces the amount of air suppliedto the vehicle interior. For this reason, youshould always observe the interval for replacingthe filter, which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmental condi-tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval maybe shorter than stated in theMaintenance Book-let.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 92). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired inte-rior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa-ted automatically 60minutes after the Smart-Key has been removed depending on variousfactors, e.g. the outside temperature. In vehi-cles with the KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function, the blower can switch on auto-matically after the engine has been switchedoff and the door opened. The vehicle is thenventilated for 30minutes to dry the automaticclimate control.

i Hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on cli-mate control in the separate Operator's Man-ual.

132 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Automatic climate control panel

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 136); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 137)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 138)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 140)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 274)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 139)D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 135)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 140)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 138)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 137)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 136)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 137)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 138)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 136)K Sets the airflow (Y page 138)L Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 135)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 140)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 138)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 137)

Overview of climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 136); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 137)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 138)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 140)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 274)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 139)D Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 135)

Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 140)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 138)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 137)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 136)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 137)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 138)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 136)K Sets the airflow (Y page 138)L Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 135)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 140)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 138)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 137)

Optimum use of automatic climatecontrol

Climate control systemBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use climate controloptimally.

RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp in theÃrocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" function is activated inautomatic mode.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.

134 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the residual heat function if you want toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior when theignition is switched off. The residual heatfunction can only be activated or deactivatedwith the ignition switched off. The residualheat function is switched off when the ignitionis switched on.

If you are controlling the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panel, notethe following:RTheY symbol appears in the rear-com-partment display.ROperation from the rear control panel is notpossible. After completing the settings for therear-compartment climate control using thefront control panel, wait five seconds. You willthen be able to control the rear climate con-trol using the rear control panel.RAfter selecting the rear compartment set-tings, the front climate control can be con-trolled automatically again via the multimediasystem after five seconds.Alternatively, you can select "Cancel rearcompartment" in the air-conditioning functionbar of the multimedia system.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 150).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only briefly

Switch on climate control primarily using theÃ rocker switch (Y page 136).

Activating/deactivating front climatecontrol using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 orhigher using theK rocker switch.

X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 usingtheK rocker switch.

Activating/deactivating rear-compart-ment climate control using the rear con-trol panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. All settings are displayed in full in therear-compartment display.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL lightsup.OFF is displayed in the rear-compartmentdisplay.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will alsonot be dehumidified. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the"Cooling with air-dehumidification" functionbriefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running. Theair inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidifiedaccording to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Operating the climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press theÁ rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

X To deactivate: press theÁ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


The indicator lamp in theÁ button flashesthree times or remainsoff. Cooling with airdehumidification canalso no longer be activa-ted using the multimediasystem; see the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.During automatic controlling, the "Cooling withair dehumidification" function is activated.

Controlling front climate control auto-matically using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Set the desired temperature using thewrocker switch on the front control unit.

X To activate: press theÃ rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp in theÃ rocker switchlights up.

X To switch to manual operation: press theK rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in theÃ rocker switchgoes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lamp ontheÃ rocker switch goes out. The functionwhich has not been changedmanually, however,continues to be controlled automatically. Whenthemanually set function switches back to auto-matic mode, the indicator lamp on theÃrocker switch lights up again.

Controlling rear climate control auto-matically using the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Set the desired temperature using rockerswitchesH andN (Y page 133).

X To activate: press rocker switchJ up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJ lightsup.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchJ up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJ goesout.

If you adjust the airflow or air distribution man-ually when in automaticmode, theAUTO displayin the rear-compartment display goes out. The

136 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

function which has not been changed manually,however, continues to be controlled automati-cally. When the manually set function switchesback to automatic mode, the AUTO displayreappears in the rear-compartment display.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsIn automatic mode you can select the followingairflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX To set: set the climate mode using the mul-timedia system (Y page 274).

Setting the temperature

General notes

You can set the temperature separately for thefollowing areas on vehicles without rear-com-partment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger area

You can set the temperature separately for thefollowing areas on vehicles with rear-compart-ment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger areaRrear compartment, left and right

Setting the temperature in the frontcompartment using the front controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To increase or reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.

X Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switchH orN up or down (Y page 133).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the footwell temperatureThe footwell temperature for the driver and frontpassenger can be set separately using the mul-timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Man-ual).


Climatecontrol

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell ventsW Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting the air distribution in the frontcompartmentThe air distribution for the left and right sides ofthe front and rear compartment can be adjustedusing the multimedia system (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).

Setting the air distribution in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Press rocker switchI orM up or downrepeatedly (Y page 133) until the desired airdistribution symbol is shown in the display.

i You can also set the air distribution in therear compartment using the multimedia sys-tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Setting the airflow

General notesYou can select different airflow settings for thedriver's and front-passenger sides as well as forthe rear compartment (only vehicles with rearcompartment climate control).Observe the notes on controlling the rear-com-partment climate control using the front controlpanel (Y page 134).

Setting the front-compartment airflowusing the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To increase or reduce: press theKrocker switch up or down.

i You can also set the front-compartment air-flow using the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual).

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switchK up or down (Y page 133).

i You can also set the front-compartment air-flow using the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual).

Activating or deactivating the syn-chronization functionClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The settings for tem-perature, air distribution and airflow on the driv-er's side are adopted for the front-passengerside and the rear compartment (vehicles withrear-compartment air conditioning).X To activate or deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the "Synchronization" function via themultimedia system (see theDigital Operator'sManual).Vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning: the SYNC display appears on therear-compartment display.

The synchronization function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger side arechangedRin vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning: the settings for the rear compartmentare changed


Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or frontside windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "Windshield defrosting"function on or offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press the¬ rocker switch onthe front control panel up or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rocker switchlights up.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode offRwindshield heating onRcooling with air dehumidification on

X To deactivate: press the¬ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rocker switchgoes out. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function with theÁ rocker switch.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function via the multimedia system; seethe Digital Operator's Manual.

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up: activate the"Windshield defrosting" function using the¬ rocker switch. The windshield heating isswitched on.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the¤ rocker switchlights up or goes out.


Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster


The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flow offresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter-ing the vehicle from outside. The air alreadyinside the vehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To activate: press theg rocker switch upor down.The indicator lamp in theg rocker switchlights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati-cally:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollutionRin a tunnelThe indicator lamp in theg rocker switch isnot lit when automatic air-recirculation mode isactivated. Outside air is added after about30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in theg rocker switchgoes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesVehicles with rear-compartment climatecontrol: once the engine is switched off, it ispossible to make use of the residual heat of theengine to continue heating or ventilating therear and front compartment of the vehicle forapproximately 15minutes. If the "Residual heat"function is set for only the front or only the rearcompartment, it is possible to continue heatingor ventilating for approximately 30 minutes.Vehicleswithout rear-compartment climatecontrol: once the engine is switched off, it ispossible to make use of the residual heat of theengine to continue heating or ventilating thefront compartment of the vehicle for approx-imately 30 minutes.The heating or ventilation time depends on thetemperature that has been set.


Front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 145).

X To activate: press the! orÁ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp in the! orÁ rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardless ofthe airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function at hightemperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-vated. The blower runs at medium speed.X To deactivate: press the! orÁrocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the! orÁ rockerswitch goes out.

Rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 145).The REST display appears on the rear com-partment display.

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL lightsup.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 133).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. REST goes out on the rear compartmentdisplay.i If you do not activate the residual heat func-tion, REST goes out automatically after fiveminutes on the rear compartment display.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30minutes if the residualheat function is activated in the front or rearcompartmentRafter approximately 15minutes if the residualheat function is activated in the front and rearcompartmentsRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNINGIf children open the vial, they could drink theperfume or it could come into contact withtheir eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do notleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull vials must not be dis-posed of with householdwaste. They must be collec-ted separately and recycledto protect the environment.

Dispose of full vials in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner and take them to aharmful substance collec-tion point.

: Vial lid; VialThe perfume atomizer helps to improve drivingcomfort.Via the multimedia system you can:Rswitch the perfume atomizer on/offRregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 274).


Climatecontrol

Z

The following conditions can affect your percep-tion of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the climate control systemRinterior temperatureRtime of year or dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati-gue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operatedwhen the climate control system is switched onand is only active when the glove box is closed.The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil-led vial. You can also choose from a variety offilled perfume vials and an empty vial which youcan fill yourself.If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to the vial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe the manufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it isempty. Dispose of the used vial after use.

X To insert the perfume vial: open the glovebox (Y page 282).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far asit will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid ofthe empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per-fume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside thevehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could dripinto the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-izer.

Problems with the perfume atomizer


The vehicle interior is notperfumed although theperfume atomizer is acti-vated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it willgo.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.(15 ml) of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty.X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

IonizationYou can use the "Ionization" function to purifythe air in the vehicle interior and attain animproved interior climate.The ionization of the interior air is odorless andcannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte-rior.

You can switch ionization on or off using themultimedia system (Y page 274).Ionization can only be switched on if the frontclimate control system is activated. The side airvent on the driver's side must be open.


Setting the air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Setting the air ventsAir vents are located:Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-boardRin the middle of the dashboardRin the glove boxRin the rear-compartment center consoleRon the left and right in the rear compartment,depending on the vehicle's equipment

Example: side air vent: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for left side air vent

X To open/close: press control=.The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise or clock-wise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by the middle fin and move it up ordown or to the left or right.

Adjust the rear air vents and the air vent in theglove box; see Digital Operator's Manual.

Setting the air vents 143

Climatecontrol

Z

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift in goodtime, before the tachometer needle reachesÔ of the way to the red area of the tachom-eter.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km), drive in drive program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Driving



G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! At low engine oil temperatures under 68 ‡(+20 †), the maximum engine speed is limi-ted in order to protect the engine. To protectthe engine and maintain smooth engine oper-ation, avoid driving at full throttle when theengine is cold.

Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate operating instructions. Otherwise, youmay not recognize dangers.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engineThe SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lockeven if it is not the correct SmartKey for thevehicle. The ignition is not switched on. Theengine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notesAll vehicles are equipped with a removableStart/Stop button.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different Smart-Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.Do not keep the SmartKey in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 292). Otherwise,the SmartKey will not be detected, e.g. whenstarting the engine with the Start/Stop button.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the front door (Y page 83), you can continueto start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Warning and indicator lamps: see(Y page 258).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if:Ryou do not start the engine within 15 minuteswhen in this positionRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stopbutton mode and SmartKey operation when thetransmission is in position P.X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in the


vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesDuring a cold start, the engine runs at higherspeeds to enable the catalytic converter toreach its operating temperature. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 152).The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P (Y page 154).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKey insteadof the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning (Y page 145).

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button can be used to start thevehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and theSmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-tion.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with youwhen leaving the vehicle, even if you only leaveit for a short time. Pay attention to the importantsafety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 145).The engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphoneObserve the important safety notes on startingthe engine (Y page 146).You can also start your engine via your smart-phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, thepreviously selected climate control setting isactivated. In this way you can cool or heat theinterior of the vehicle before starting the jour-ney.Only start the engine via your smartphone if it issafe to start and run the engine where your vehi-cle is parked.Observe the legal stipulations in the area whereyour vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-phone may be limited to certain countries orregions.You can execute amaximum of two consecutivestarting attempts via your smartphone. If youinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, youcan carry out two more starting attempts.Once you have started the engine, you canswitch the engine off via your smartphone at anytime.You can only start the engine via your smart-phone if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lockRpark position P is selectedRthe accelerator pedal is not depressedRthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated

Driving 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe panic alarm is not activatedRthe hazard warning lamps are switched offRthe hood is closed.Rthe doors are closed and lockedRthe windows and sliding sunroof are closedAlso make sure that:Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filledRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

G WARNINGLimbs could be crushed or trapped if theengine is started unintentionally during ser-vice or maintenance work. There is a risk ofinjury.Always secure the engine against uninten-tional starting before carrying out mainte-nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started viayour smartphone before carrying out mainte-nance or repairs. You can prevent an enginestart via your smartphone, for example, if you:Rswitch on the hazard warning lampsRdo not lock the doorsRopen the hood

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 84).

It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. Only then is the parking lockreleased.If you do not depress the brake pedal, theDIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 164).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in positioni.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionHybrid vehicles: observe the notes on the ECOstart/stop function in the separate operatinginstructions.The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.


The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-Key or the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, theèECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-play.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill with thetransmission inh ori, the ECO start/stopfunction switches off the engine automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system does not detect any moisture onthe windshield when the automatic climatecontrol is switched onRthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active whenthe engine is stopped automatically.The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. It isthen not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase. Whenyou depress the accelerator pedal, the enginestarts automatically and the braking effect ofthe HOLD function is deactivated.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-ted.All other models: automatic engine switch-offcan take place amaximum of four times in a row(initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch-offs).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRyou switch to drive program S or MRin transmission positionh ori, the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gearkRyou move the transmission out of positionjRyou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires this

Driving 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the automatic climate control isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too lowShifting the transmission to positionj doesnot start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive programC, press ECObutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S orM(Y page 155).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If drive program S or M is active, the auto-matic transmission switches to drive programC.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or as

the result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.If drive program S or M has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactivated.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the drive pro-gram automatically switches to C.

All other models

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.If drive program S or M has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactivated.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the drive pro-gram automatically switches to E.


Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the SmartKey back to positiong in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 146). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 316). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate Operator's Manual. Otherwise, youmay not recognize dangers.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmissionposition display in the multifunction display(Y page 154).

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyand remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the SmartKeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 179) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 174).

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 149).

Shifting to neutral N


X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMGvehicles)The current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive programThe arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram E or S.

Mercedes-AMG vehiclesThe current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position; Drive program

The arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.If the transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display is not working, you should pullaway carefully to check whether the desiredtransmission position is engaged. Ideally, youshould select transmission position D and driveprogram C or S.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 162). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to the park-ing lock in order to secure the vehi-cle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.


A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission to position N if thevehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive programRthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-ment restricts switching between transmissionpositionsD and R to speeds up to amaximum of5mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R, move theDIRECT SELECT lever up and down past thepoint of resistance.

Program selector button

X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles): press program selector button: tochange the drive program.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.


Drivingandparking

Z

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press programselector button: repeatedly until the letterfor the desired drive program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button influences:Rthe drive program (Y page 156)Rthe engine managementOn Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E iscalled drive program C.The automatic transmission switches to auto-matic drive program E (drive program C inMercedes-AMG vehicles).All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

You can also activate manual drive program Musing the steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 157). In manual drive program M, youcan briefly change gear yourself by using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.Mercedes-AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Permanent drive programM is only available forMercedes-AMG vehicles.Further information about permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 158).You can also activate manual drive program Musing the steering wheel paddle shifters

(Y page 157). In manual drive program M, youcan briefly change gear yourself by using thesteering wheel paddle shifters.For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 156).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

You can activate manual drive programM in theE (C in AMG vehicles) and S automatic driveprograms using steering wheel paddle shift-ers: and; (Y page 157). In manual driveprogramM, you can briefly change gear yourselfby using the steering wheel paddle shifters.Mercedes-AMGvehicles: you can also activatemanual drive program M with the programselector button (Y page 158). In manual driveprogram M, you can permanently change gearyourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program EDrive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, forexample on slippery road surfaces.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.


Automatic drive program SDrive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine settings.Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.The fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.You can activate manual drive programM in theE (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) and S auto-matic drive programs.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: as well as temporarydrive program M, you can also activate perma-nent drive program M. Further informationabout permanent drive program M(Y page 158).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 156).Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-vated.All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles:) M and the selected gear appear in themultifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for a limi-ted amount of time. Depending on which steer-ing wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatictransmission immediately shifts into the nextgear down or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If themaximum engine speed on the currentlyengaged gear is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmission auto-

matically shifts up in order to prevent enginedamage.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatictransmission will not shift up to the next gearwhen the engine speed is very low.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The mul-tifunction display shows the recommendedgear.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activatedmanual drive programM, itwill remain active for a certain amount of time.Under certain conditions the minimum amountof time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateralacceleration, during an overrun phase or whendriving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deactiva-ted, the automatic transmission shifts into theautomatic drive program that was last selected.


Drivingandparking

Z

You can also deactivate manual drive programM yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in place (Y page 156).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 155).Manual drive program M is deactivated. Theautomatic transmission switches to the pre-viously activated drive program E (drive pro-gram C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S.

Manual drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.Manual drive program M is different from driveprogram S with regard to spontaneity, respon-siveness and smoothness of gear changes.As well as this permanent drive programM, youcan also activate temporary drive programM (Y page 157).

Switching on the manual drive programInmanual drive programM, you can change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters if thetransmission is in position D. You can see thecurrently selected drive programandwhich gearis engaged in the multifunction display.X Press the program selector button(Y page 155) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

Upshifting! In manual drive program M, the automatictransmission does not shift up automatically

even when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.X When message; appears in the multifunc-tion display, pull on the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 156).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear if this is permissible.

Maximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects the opti-mum gear according to the speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,the automatic transmission automatically shiftsdown.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 155) repeatedly until C or S appearsin the multifunction display.


Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.7G-TRONIC: it is only possible to shift into second gear and reversegear.9G-TRONIC: it is only partly possible to engage the gears or the trans-mission is in position N.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.7G-TRONIC: If D is selected, the transmission shifts into secondgear, if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni-tion must be switched off (the SmartKey orStart/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1)if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometerRthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicles with4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 159

Drivingandparking

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 372).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 159).Hybrid vehicles:observe the notes on refuelingin the separate operating instructions.If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed inthe instrument cluster8. The arrow next tothe filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be usedX Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

160 RefuelingDrivingandparking

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add anymore fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel mayleak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.

If you drive at speeds above 1 mph (2 km/h)with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel FillerFlap Open message is shown in the multifunc-tion display.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 244).In addition, the; Check Engine warninglamp may light up (Y page 264).For further information onwarning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 264).

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 145).orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 145).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Refueling 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.


! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartKey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 145).The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to SmartKey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartKey position 0: "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe SmartKey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.With the Start/Stop button: if you then openthe driver's door or the front-passenger door,the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-ically.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.

162 ParkingDrivingandparking

X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergencywhile the vehicle is in motion by pressing andholding the Start/Stop button for three sec-onds. This function operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-offfunction.

Electric parking brake

General notes


The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction inthe system, it may not be possible to apply thereleased parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it rollingaway.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contact aqualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a functiontest at regular intervals while the engine isswitched off. The sounds that can be heardwhilethis is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also be appliedwhen the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clustergoes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from beingautomatically applied, pull handle:.The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-matically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-tionaryRActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehiclestationary

Parking 163

Drivingandparking

Z

In addition, at least one of the following condi-tions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is openedRthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup.The electric parking brake is not automaticallyengaged if the engine is switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released automat-ically when all of the following conditions arefulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastenedRyou depress the accelerator pedalIf the automatic transmission is in position R,the trunk lid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission positionP or you have previously driven faster than2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceleratorpedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parkingbrake will be released and the vehicle will startto move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the electric parking brake.X While driving, push handle: of the electricparking brake (Y page 163).The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater the brak-ing force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-sage appearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

Hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on the high-voltage battery in the separate Operator's Man-ual.

Driving tips

General driving tips


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control


Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop . Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display provides feedback on how eco-nomical your driving characteristics are. TheECO display assists you in achieving the mosteconomical driving style for the selected set-tings and prevailing conditions. Your drivingstyle can significantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.

Driving tips 165

Drivingandparking

Z

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccel.RConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percentageindicates a more economical driving style.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. A fixed percentage count in theECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-tion.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RLoadRTire pressureRCold startRChoice of routeRActive electrical consumersThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carried outusing the following three categories:RAccel. (evaluation of all acceleration pro-cesses)- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior atall times)- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-ance of unnecessary acceleration anddeceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses)- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-ing your distance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle can coast withoutuse of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent brakingAn economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccel. and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on thehighway, only the bar for Constant will change.

The ECO display summarizes the driving char-acteristics from the start of the journey to itscompletion. For this reason, the bars changedynamically at the beginning of the journey. Onlonger journeys, there are fewer changes. Formore dynamic changes, carry out a manualreset.Show the ECO display (Y page 214).

Braking


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.


! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-sult a qualified specialist workshop inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP® systemoperates automatically. The engine and theignition must therefore be switched off (theSmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust bein position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brakeis tested on a brake dynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically. The engine andthe ignition must therefore be switched off(the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in theignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust bein position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested using abrake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® maycause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 66)and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 67).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake disksand brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedbyMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.

Driving tips 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brakedisks to which the wheel assembly with rim andthreaded connection is matched.The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrack width and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakediscs, such as when changing wheels, can leadto a reduction in comfort when driving with light-weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads onthe lightweight brake disks, particularly on thebrake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking. Thiswill depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age thatwill be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wearwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. Especially for high performance driving,it is important to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tires have adequate tread depthFor this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speedRavoid rutsRavoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.


G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 345).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 345).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 345).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver in

critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewellthought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 65).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. Change into a lowergear in good time on long and steep downhillgradients. This is especially important if thevehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. This relievesthe load on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.You can use cruise control if you want to drive ata steady speed for a prolonged period of time.You can store any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates cruise control? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds. In the speedometer, the segmentslight up from the stored speed to the end of thescale.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down;beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards= .

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.When you switch off the engine, the last speedstored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance fromthe vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec-ted with the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk ofan accident if you fail to adapt your driving stylenor override the laws of physics. DISTRONICPLUS cannot take account of road, weather andtraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedA Sets a specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must be released.RESP® must be activated, but not interveningat present.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.


Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift the transmission fromP toD or your seatbelt must be fastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements):briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: to the pressurepoint for a higher speed, or down; for alower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements):briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: past the pres-sure point for a higher speed, or down; fora lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup or down, the last speed stored is increasedor reduced.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.


X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ-ously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.


orX Accelerate briefly.The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed tothat of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe stored speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle infront, the system operates like a cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. Inthis way, the specified minimum distance youhave selected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed tothe set speed.

Selecting the drive programAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG):DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you select the S drive program(Y page 155). Acceleration behind the vehicle infront or to the set speed is then noticeably moredynamic. If you have selected the E driving pro-

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

gram, the vehicle accelerates more gently. Thissetting is recommended in stop-and-start traf-fic.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSsupports a sporty driving style when you selectthe S or M drive program (Y page 155). Accel-eration behind the vehicle in front or to the setspeed is then noticeably more dynamic. Whenyou select the C drive program, the vehicleaccelerates more gently. This setting is recom-mended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesDISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching tothe overtaking lane, if:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofa collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmon-itors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) orthe right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles).

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 176).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has stopped, it will cause your vehicle tobrake and come to a halt.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brake securesthe vehicle and relieves the service brake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction occurs, the transmission mayalso shift into position P automatically.

Setting a speedX Push the cruise control lever upwards: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly pushthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly pushthe cruise control lever up: or down;beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed back to the


last speed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle infront, depending on the driving speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 175).Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis-tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec-essary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian-gle; shows the stored speed.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up. The seg-ments likewise light up if a vehicle in front isdetected in the fast lane.For design reasons, the speed displayed in thespeedometer may differ slightly from the speedset for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Displays in the assistance graphic

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deac-tivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appearswhen the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX To call up the assistance graphic:select theAssistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 221).You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message appears in themultifunction display for approximately five sec-onds. The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically securedwith the elec-tric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage willbe displayed in the multifunction display forapproximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUSmay not detect vehicles which are not drivingin the middle of their lane. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONICPLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting inyet. The distance to this vehicle will be tooshort.RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect the vehicle in front on the edge of theroad because of its narrow width. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.RObstacles and stationary vehicles:DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and reveals anobstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis-takenly detect vehicles that are crossing yourlane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at trafficlights with crossing traffic, for example, could


cause your vehicle to pull away unintention-ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot helps you keep the vehicle in thecenter of the lane by means of moderate steer-ing interventions in a speed range from0–125 mph (0–200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the top ofthe windshield.In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,taking into account lane markings, e.g. whenyou are following vehicles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h),Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings(left and right), only focusing on the vehicle infront if clear lane markings are not present.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support if these conditions do not exist.DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for thefunction to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotcan neither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. It cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and trafficconditions and does not detect all road users. Ifyou are following a vehicle which is drivingtowards the edge of the road, your vehicle couldcome into contact with the curb or other roadboundaries. Be particularly aware of other roadusers, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to yourvehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on the laneor projecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, steering inter-vention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle backto the lane. In such cases, you must steer thevehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leavethe lane.The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

The system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activatedagain automatically after a lane change is com-pleted.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notesfor DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:Steering Assist. On message appears in

the multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-ted but not ready for a steering intervention,steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If thesystem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:Steering Assist. Offmessage appears inthe multifunction display. Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.



G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Further information on deactivating the HOLDfunction (Y page 179).


Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all of thefollowing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time doesnot activate the HOLD function, wait briefly andthen try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-ing brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.After a time, the electric parking brake securesthe vehicle and relieves the service brake. TheHOLD function is then deactivated.When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also be shif-ted into position P automatically.

MAGIC BODY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of Active BodyControl (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCAN as well asautomatic vehicle stabilization in the event of acrosswind.Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride heightto improve driving safety and reduce fuel con-sumption. The suspension mode is adjustedaccording to your selection (sports or comfort),the road surface conditions and the vehicle load.A multifunction camera detects bumps in theroad surface before the vehicle drives overthem. This reduces chassis movements.


G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine isswitched off. When parking, position yourvehicle so that it does not make contact withthe curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehi-cle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind AssistThe crosswind stabilization operates by chang-ing wheel loads through adjusting the ABCspring struts. It reduces impairments in handlingwhen driving in a straight line and assists duringcountersteering.

Crosswind Assist is active in the speed rangebetween 50 mph (80 km/h) and130 mph (210 km/h) when driving straightahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control ABC

Vehicle levelMercedes-AMG vehicles: depending on thevehicle level that has been selected, the vehicleautomatically adjusts its height dependent onthe current speed. The vehicle is lowered by upto 0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as thespeed increases. As the speed is reduced, thevehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.All other models: depending on the vehiclelevel that has been set, the vehicle automaticallyadjusts its height dependent on the currentspeed. The vehicle is lowered by up to 0.6 in(15mm) as the speed increases. As the speed isreduced, the vehicle is raised up to the set vehi-cle height.Select the "Normal" setting for normal road con-ditions and "Raised" for drivingwith snow chainsor in particularly poor road conditions.

Setting the vehicle levelX To raise the vehicle: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To lower the vehicle: press button: again.Indicator lamp; goes out.

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Suspension tuningThe electronically controlled ABC suspensionsystem detects the vehicle level and the vehicleload and adjusts the setting accordingly. Youcan also choose between a particularly sporty ora comfortable tuning.


The ABC suspension system is tuned individu-ally to each wheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fortRthe vehicle loadRthe force of the side windYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSPORT mode ensures even better contact withthe road. The steering response behavior issporty. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style on flat roads, e.g. on high-ways.Selecting the sports suspension settingX When indicator lamp; is off: press but-ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp;is on.Sports suspension tuning is selected.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen‐sion System SPORTmessage appears in themultifunction display.All other models: the Active Body Con‐trol SPORT message appears on the multi-function display.

In COMFORT mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are especially comfortable. Thesteering response behavior is balanced. Selectthis mode if you favor a comfortable drivingstyle.Selecting the comfortable suspension settingX When indicator lamp; is off: press but-ton: repeatedly until only indicator lamp;is on.Comfortable suspension tuning is selected.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen‐sion System COMFORT message appears inthe multifunction display.All other models: the Active Body Con‐trol COMFORTmessage appears on the mul-tifunction display.

ROAD SURFACE SCANi This function is not available in all countries.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitorsthe road in front of the vehicle using multifunc-tion camera: at the top of the windshield. Thisfunction is automatically active if you selectcomfort suspension tuning. The system isoperational at speeds of up to 81 mph(130 km/h).This function allows bumps in the road surfaceto be detected before the vehicle drives overthem. The spring struts are then actuated, withthe result that chassis movements are signifi-cantly reduced when driving over bumps.The system is deactivated when you select theraised vehicle level or sports mode.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthe road surface is insufficiently litRthere is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog orsprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or fromoncoming trafficRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered,for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of thecameraRthe road surface has no texture or is reflec-tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt,concrete slabs or puddlesRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Rsections of the route have a very small radiusof curvatureRif you accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension with variabledamping for improved driving comfort. All-roundlevel control ensures the best possible suspen-sion and constant ground clearance, evenwith aladen vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle islowered automatically to improve driving safetyand to reduce fuel consumption. There is alsothe option to manually adjust the vehicle level.AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level controland the Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS.


G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Normal"setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised"for driving with snow chains or on particularly

poor road surfaces. Your selection remainsstored even if you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to thenormal level.The Vehicle Risingmessage appears in themultifunction display.i The message disappears after ten seconds,irrespective of the level reached. If necessary,the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph(120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed above 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle levelX Start the engine.If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUS auto-matically controls the calibration of the damp-ers.The damping is tuned individually to each wheeland depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

i You can choose between the sporty andcomfortable mode. One of the two modes isalways active.


Sports tuning

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning inSPORT mode ensures the best possible contactwith the road. Select this mode when employinga sporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.Mercedes-AMG vehicles:X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If the drivingspeed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h), thevehicle is automatically lowered by another0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normal levelin sport mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

All other models:X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected. The vehicle is loweredby 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to the normallevel.The AIRMATIC SPORTmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,select this mode if you favor amore comfortabledriving style. Select comfort mode also whendriving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.X If indicator lamp;is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Comfort tuning isselected.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG Suspen‐sion System COMFORT message appears inthe multifunction display.All other models: theAIRMATIC COMFORTmessage appears on the multifunction dis-play.

If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph(120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-ered by another 0.4 in (10mm) compared to thenormal level in comfort mode.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences in thevehicle level by raising or lowering the axles.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-nently driven. Together with ESP®, it improvesthe traction of your vehicle whenever a drivewheel spins due to insufficient grip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC canneither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

In wintry driving conditions, themaximum effectof 4MATIC can only be achieved if you usewintertires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensorsPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners); Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center)? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean


the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 323).Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-cle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in the instru-ment cluster. The warning display for the reararea is located on the headliner in the rear com-partment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read-iness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is activated automaticallywhen you switch on the ignition.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 323).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention and brake application can assist youduring parking and when exiting a parkingspace. You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 184).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch folded out,the minimum length for parking spaces isslightly longer.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, youshould not use Active Parking Assist. Once theelectrical connection is established between

your vehicle and the trailer, Active ParkingAssist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC isdeactivated for the rear area.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable for park-ing, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces


Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 185) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceledRWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over-hangs or loading ramps.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.

If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 184).Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain switched on until you acknowl-edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-ing thea button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.


The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.

The Park Assist Active Select R ObserveSurroundingsmessage appears in the multi-function display.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Switched Off messageappears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicleis now parked. The vehicle is kept stationarywithout the driver having to depress the brakepedal. The braking effect is canceled when youdepress the accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,you must steer and brake again yourself.PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should thetransmission change take place too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-ble parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide. Your vehicle can be maneuveredinto a position at a maximum of 45° to thestarting position in the parking space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automaticallywhilst thevehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youare pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure:press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake Observe

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Surroundingsmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Switched Offmessage appearsin the multifunction display. You will then haveto steer and merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take overthe steering before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful if yourecognize that it is already possible to pull out ofthe parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 185).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.

If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind thevehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdepends on the language setting. The follow-ing are examples of rear view camera displaysin the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)


Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).The guide lines on the multimedia system showthe distances to your vehicle. The distances onlyapply to road level.The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust bymeans of a flap.When the rearview camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the maneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 323).For technical reasons, the flapmay remain openbriefly after the rear view camera has beendeactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the Activa‐tion by R gear function is selected in themultimedia system; see Digital Operator'sManual.

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-media systemshows the area behind the vehi-cle with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

X Shift the transmission to position P.orX Drive forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the handle inthe trunk lid

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 185), addi-tional measurement operational readiness indi-cator; appears in the multimedia system. Ifthe PARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in the multi-media system.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.


Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on.The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

180° view

: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta 180° view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 185),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in themultimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active, warning displays; light upin the multimedia system in yellow or redaccordingly.

Object detectionThe rear view camera can detect moving andstationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrianor another vehicle is detected, these objects aremarked with bars. The system is only able todetect and mark stationary objects when yourvehicle is moving. When the vehicle is station-ary, moving objects can be detected andmarked.To ensure that you can use the function, it mustbe switched on in the multimedia system (seethe Digital Operator's Manual).

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting of fourcameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors

The cameras cover the immediate surroundingsof the vehicle. The 360° camera assists you, forinstance when parking or at exits with reducedvisibility.You can show images from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in six different split-screenviews on the multimedia system. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle. Thisview is calculated from the data supplied by theinstalled cameras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)RTop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)RTop view and enlarged rear viewRTop view and enlarged front viewRTop view and images from the rear-facing sidecameras (rear wheel view)RTop view and images from the forward-facingside cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the guide linesare hidden in the multimedia system.When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will alsobe optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONICis activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,


make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing a rapidchange in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or covered.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 323)Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.The guide lines on the multimedia system showthe distances to your vehicle. The distances onlyapply to road level.The cameras in the front and in the rear area areeach protected by a flap. These flaps are openedwhen the 360° camera is activated. Observe thenotes on cleaning (Y page 323). For technicalreasons, the flaps may remain open briefly afterthe 360° camera has been deactivated.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder,rear bicycle carrier).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe image from the 360° camera appears if:Rthe multimedia system is switched onRthe 360° Camera function is switched onIf the 360° camera is activated at speeds aboveapproximately 19 mph (30 km/h), a warningmessage appears.The warning message disappears if:Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approximately19 mph (30 km/h). The 360° camera is thenactivated.Rthe message is confirmed with the% but-ton.

Switching the 360° camera on/off withthe button

X To switch on: press button:.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image from thefront cameraRfull screen display with the image from therear view camera

X To switch off: press button: again.

Switching on the 360° camera andmul-timedia systemX Press theØ button in the center console.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select the 360° camera: turn and press thecontroller.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle in split-screen mode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and the imagefrom the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen view and fullscreen modeSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.Switching to full screen mode:X Turn and press 180° Viewwith the controller.The 180° option is only available in the followingviews:RTop view with picture from the rear view cam-eraRTop view with picture from the front camera

Displays in the multimedia system

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on the trunklidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)


B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking of the tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facingside camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

i You can also select the side camera settingfor the rear-facing view.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stopped:Rwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe viewwhichwas active before the 360° cam-era was displayed appears in the multimediasystem. You can also stop the 360° camera dis-play split-screen view by selecting the%symbol in the display and then confirming withthe COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph(200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. Itmight not always recognize fatigue or increasinginattentiveness in time or fail to recognize themat all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assistof DISTRONIC PLUSRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessmentis deleted and restarted when continuing thejourney, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

The current status information can also beshown in the on-board computer.


X Call up the assistance graphic and selectATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 221).

The following information appears:RLength of the journey since the last break.RThe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in abar display in five levels from high to lowRIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot issue a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 223).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

If Standard is selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attention levelis set to normal.If Sensitive is selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by AttentionAssist is adapted accordingly and the driver iswarned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the assistance graphic display.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (Stand‐ard/Sensitive).Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take aBreak! .In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If you donot take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con-

tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutesat the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators offatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.If a warning is given in the multifunction display,the multimedia system offers a service stationsearch. You can select a service station andnavigation to this service station will then begin.This function can be activated and deactivatedin the multimedia system.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data and general traffic regulations stored inthe navigation system are used to determine thecurrent speed limit.Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, andfor this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There isalso no display for changing traffic signs.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.The sign indicating the end of a restriction onlyappears with the restriction in the instrumentcluster when:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail-able sources, no speed limit appears in theinstrument cluster either.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, display: appears in theassistance graphic (Y page 221).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Activating Traffic Sign AssistX Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display usingthe on-board computer (Y page 222).

If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist dis-play in the on-board computer, the traffic regu-lations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions)appear in the instrument cluster for five secondsin each case. The wrong-way warning and thetraffic sign display for speed limits and overtak-ing restrictions remain active even when thedisplay has been deactivated.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 221).Detected traffic signs appear in the instru-ment cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph(60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply.The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driving.It is generally neither shown on the traffic signnor on the instrument cluster but must be takeninto account when observing the maximum per-mitted speed.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by thenormal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus usesinfrared light to illuminate the road. Night ViewAssist Plus camera; picks up the infrared lightand displays a monochrome image in the multi-function display. The image shown in the displaycorresponds to a road lit up by high-beam head-lamps. This enables you to see the road's course


and any obstacles in good time. When pedes-trian recognition is active, pedestrians recog-nized by the system are visually highlighted incolor in the Night View Assist Plus display withsmall frame corners.In addition, an infrared camera is integrated intoradiator trim:. The camera helps detectpedestrians and animals. Observe the notes oncleaning the infrared camera (Y page 324).

i Infrared light is not visible to the human eyeand therefore does not glare. Night ViewAssist Plus can therefore remain switched oneven if there is oncoming traffic.

Important safety notesNight View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving. Do not rely onthe Night View Assist Plus display. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking in goodtime. Drive carefully and always adapt your driv-ing style to suit the prevailing road and trafficconditions.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered,for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of thecameraRthe infrared camera in the radiator trim isdirty, fogged up or obscuredRon bends, hilltops or downhill gradientsRat high outside temperaturesNight View Assist Plus cannot display objectsdirectly in front of or beside the vehicle.It is possible that, in addition to people and ani-mals, other objects are also marked or highligh-ted .

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notesPedestrian or animal recognition may beimpaired or inoperative if:Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirelyobscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehi-clesRthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the ani-mal in the Night View Assist Plus display is

incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerfullight reflectionsRpedestrians or animals do not contrast withthe surroundingsRthe camera system no longer recognizespedestrians as persons due to special cloth-ing or other objectsRpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g.sitting, squatting or lyingRanimals are not recognized by the system,e.g. because of their size or shape

Pedestrian and animal recognition is deactiva-ted at temperatures above 90 ‡ (32 †). Thespotlight function and automatic delayedswitch-off are then no longer active.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian rec-

ognition= Highlighting? Pedestrian recognizedNight View Assist Plus can recognize pedes-trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the bodycontours and posture of a person standingupright.Pedestrian recognition is then switched on auto-matically if:RNight View Assist Plus is activated.Ryou are driving faster than approximately6 mph (10 km/h).Rit is dark.If pedestrian recognition is active, readinesssymbol; appears. Persons who are detectedare highlighted by framing=. If the pedestrianrecognition system has brought a pedestrian toyour attention, look through the windshield toevaluate the situation. The actual distance to

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

objects and pedestrians cannot be gaged accu-rately by looking at a screen.

Animal recognitionAnimals can be recognized in the following sit-uations:RdarknessRoutside built-up areasRbelow an ambient temperature of 90 ‡(32 †).

Night View Assist Plus can recognize larger ani-mals such as deer, cows or horses using typicalcharacteristics.The system does not detect:Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and catsRanimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec-ognizable

When detected, animals are marked with smallcolor frame corners. In contrast to pedestrianrecognition, there is no separate readiness sym-bol in the multifunction display.

Activating/deactivating Night ViewAssist Plus

Activation conditionsYou can only activate Night ViewAssist Plus if allof the following conditions are met:Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 145) or theengine has been started.Rthe light switch is in theÃ or L posi-tion.Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating/deactivating

X Press button:.If Night View Assist Plus is activated, theNight View Assist Plus display is shown in themultifunction display.

The infrared headlamps only switch on in thedark from speeds of approximately 6 mph(10 km/h). This means that you do not have thefull visual range while the vehicle is stationaryand cannot check whether Night View AssistPlus is working. The infrared headlamps aredeactivated at speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).The Night View image continues to be displayeduntil you deactivate it by pressing button:.

Automatic activationYou can select the Night View Assist Auto‐matic Activation option via the Night ViewAssist menu. The pedestrian and animal searchfunction remains active even when the NightView image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlitsurroundings and at speeds of more than60 km/h, the Night View image is automaticallydisplayed in themultifunction display as soon aspedestrians or animals are detected.X In the assistancemenu, select automatic acti-vation of Night View Assist Plus(Y page 222).

Spotlight function

General notesUnder certain conditions, the spotlight functionuses the headlamps to flash at detected pedes-trians.The spotlight function is only active if:Rpedestrian recognition is activeRthe road surface is not litRthe driving speed is at least 40 mph(60 km/h)Rthe "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" func-tion is activated (Y page 127).

The spotlight function is not active or is activeonly to a limited extent if:Ryou are driving in city trafficRthere are pedestrians located in the area of anoncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight functionThe pedestrian detection with spotlight functionis running the background. If the prerequisitesare met, the spotlight function uses the head-


lamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestriandetected on or near to the road.X In the lightmenu, select the spotlight functionof Night View Assist Plus (Y page 225).

The spotlight function does not flash at animals.

Display in the assistance graphic

X To display the assistance graphic:selectthe Assistance Graphicmenuusing the on-board computer (Y page 221).Pedestrian symbol: in the assistancegraphic indicates the status of the spotlightfunction. If the symbol is displayed not filledin, the function is switched on. If the symbol isdisplayed filled in, the conditions for the spot-light function are met.

Problems with Night View Assist Plus


The picture quality ofNight View Assist Plushas deteriorated.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.X Fold down camera cover (Y page 324).X Defrost the windshield (Y page 139).

The windshield is iced up.X De-ice the windshield (Y page 139).

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 129).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a carwash.X Clean the windshield (Y page 322).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.X Replace the windshield.

The pedestrian and ani-mal recognition is notavailable.

the infrared camera in the radiator trim is dirtyX Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Driving Assistance PLUS package consistsof DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171), Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 204) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 206).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,to monitor the area to the sides of the vehiclewhich the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-play in the exterior mirrors draws your attentionto vehicles detected in the monitored area. Ifyou then switch on the corresponding turn sig-nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti-cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-sion is detected, corrective braking may helpyou avoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-uates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-sors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging cargo. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.


At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m);from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon-itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= andbehind: your vehicle, as shown in the picture.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the inner edge ofyour lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 20mph (30 km/h).Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind SpotAssist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, grayradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display. Above a speed of20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar wavesin the assistance display changes to green;.Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You will then hear a double warningtone and red warning lamp flashes. If the turn

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp . Thereare no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,the red warning lamp flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,a display underlining the danger of a side colli-sion appears in the multifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-cor-recting brake application may be interrupted atany time by countersteering slightly or acceler-ating.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 223)

X Switch on the ignition.Warning lamps in the exterior mirrors light upred for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radarwaves propagating backwards appear next tothe vehicle in the assistance display on themultifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in a speed rangebetween 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take account ofroad and weather conditions. It may not recog-nize traffic situations. Active Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.


Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpersor the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured bysnowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andbroken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor-recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic conditions or road users. In very rarecases, the systemmaymake an inappropriatebrake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk ofan accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.The brake application also slightly reduces vehi-cle speed.A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognize asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be detected.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.A further lane-correcting brake application canonly occur after your vehicle has returned to theoriginal lane.No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.Ran obstacle in the lane inwhich you are drivinghas been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmay not detect otherroad users or traffic situations. An inappropriatebrake applicationmay be interrupted at any timeif you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Rswitch on the turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keep‐ing Assist Onmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display. If all conditions have beensatisfied, a warning or steering interventionmay be made.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphic(Y page 221) appear in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneKeeping Assist Off message appears inthe multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssist menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist function (Y page 223).

X Select setting Standard or Adaptive.When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs in the following situations:


Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs in the following situations:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z


G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 35).Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate Operator's Manual. Otherwise, youmay not recognize dangers.

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe light sensor in the instrument cluster auto-matically controls the brightness of the multi-function display. In daylight, the displays in the

instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimmingfunction is not possible in daylight.The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted using the brightness control knob.The brightness control is located between theinstrument cluster and the multimedia systemdisplay (Y page 36).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If you turn the light switch (Y page 124) to theT,Ã or L position, the brightnesswill depend upon the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

Speedometer segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 169):The segments light up from the stored speedto the end of the scale.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 171):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in frontmoving more slowly than the stored speed:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 212).

210 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

There is a short delay before a change in outsidetemperature is shown in the multifunction dis-play.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is above 257 ‡(125 †) do not drive any further. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the lowersection of the tachometer (Y page 35).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).

Operating the on-board computer

: Instrument cluster with multifunction dis-play

; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.Left control panel

ò ROpens the menu list

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the track or station list andselects a station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and selects aname or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold:RScrolls quickly through all listsRIn the Radio or Media menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the Telephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone book isopen

Displays and operation 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

a RIn all menus: confirms the selectedentry in the listRIn the Radio or Media menu:opens the list of available radiosources or mediaRIn the Telephone menu: switchesto the phone book and starts dial-ing the selected number

ñ RSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the Radio or Mediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list or listof available radio sources ormediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-tem (see the separate operatinginstructions)

Multifunction display

: Top status bar; Display= Bottom status barDisplay panel; shows the selected menu orsubmenu and display messages.X To open the menu list: press theò but-ton on the steering wheel.The menu list appears in display panel;.

Possible top status bar displays:R- -‡ Outside temperature (Y page 210)R# Turn signal, left (Y page 125)RL Low-beam headlamps (Y page 125)RK High-beam headlamps (Y page 125)RT Parking lamps and license plate lamps(Y page 125)R! Turn signal, right (Y page 125)Possible bottom status bar displays:Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 148)Rë HOLD function (Y page 178)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 186)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus(Y page 126)Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot (Y page 177)R--- km/h Additional speedometer(Y page 225)

Head-up display

General notesThe Head-up Display projects information fromthe navigation system and the driver assistancesystem above the dashboard into the driver'sfield of vision. The Head-up Display allows the

212 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

driver to see all of the information without hav-ing to take their eyes off the road.A requirement for the display of the contents isthat the following functions are available in thevehicle and are switched on:RCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRTraffic Sign AssistRNavigation

Important safety notesThe Head-up Display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.Speed limits and overtaking restrictions are notalways correctly displayed. Traffic signs alwayshave priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display.The visibility of the Head-up Display is influ-enced by the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general ambient lightRsunglasses with polarization filtersRwet roadsRblocking of sunlight by objects on the displaycover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of thedisplay may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the Head-up Display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip-ped with a special windshield. Should repairsbe necessary, have thewindshield replaced ata qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

X Press button:.When the Head-up Display is switched on, thedisplay appears in the driver's field of vision.

Standard displays in the Head-up Display

: Navigation messages; Current speed= Detected instructions and traffic signs? Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set

speed

AMG displays in the Head-up Display

: Upshift indicator; Currently selected gear, gearshift options

when shifting manually= Current engine speed? Current speed

Setting optionsYou can adjust the following settings in theHead-up Display submenu:Radjust the position of the Head-up Display onthe windshield (Y page 224)Radjust the brightness of the displays in theHead-up Display (Y page 224)Rselect displays in the Head-up Display(Y page 224).

Displays and operation 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Using the Display Content function, youcan, depending on your vehicle's equipment,choose between four standard displays. Theselected contents then appear in the Head-upDisplay.In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can alsochoose between two AMG displays. If youselect an AMG display, the Head-up Displayshows AMG-specific contents.If you select a display with traffic signs, detec-ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assistappear in the Head-up Display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheel toopen the menu list.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 211).Depending on the vehicle equipment, you canselect the following menu:RTrip menu (Y page 214)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 215)RRadio menu (Y page 217)RMedia menu (Y page 218)RTelephone menu (Y page 219)RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 221)RService menu (Y page 221)RSettings menu (Y page 221)RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)(Y page 226)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

: Range of the fuel supply; Current fuel consumption= Recuperation displayMercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-plays approximate range:.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the display.Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, a vehicle being refueledCappears instead of approximate range:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyhas been recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.

ECO displayThe ECO display is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.


214 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays


X Select ECO Display with: or9.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 165).

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select From Start orFrom Reset.The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 215).In the following cases, the trip computer isautomatically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.

Digital speedometerX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting valuesX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa briefly.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From Start" trip computer arealso reset. If you reset the values in the "FromStart" trip computer, the values in the ECOdisplay are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can find fur-ther information on navigation instructions inthe multimedia system in the Digital Operator'sManual.X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

Menus and submenus 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Navi menu.


Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Target of the change of direction; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane not recommended (dark gray)A Possible lane (light gray)B Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)On multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended?: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will only be able to com-plete the next change of direction in this lane.Recommended laneB: in this lane you will beable to complete the next change of directionand the one after that.


-board

computerand

displays

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to be made, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection. The change of direction starts oncethe distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency band; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackA Genre


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The presetposition is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored. You can store radio sta-tions in the multimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently set station; appears in the multi-function display.

X To open the station list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a station in the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9.

X To select the waveband or station mem-ory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select thewaveband orstation memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information about radio operation canbe found in the multimedia system in the Dig-ital Operator's Manual.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playbackmode (audio, video or TV) at any time in theMedia menu.X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Media menu.


X To open/close the media sourceslist:pressa briefly.The list shows the following media sources,for example:RCD or DVDRSD cardRMedia RegisterRUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® capable audio device

Please observe further information on mediasupport and media operation in the multimediasystem (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of current CD; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.


-board

computerand

displays



X To select an audio player or media:pressa briefly.The list containing the media sourcesappears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.X To open the track list:press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous track fromthe track list:press the: or9 buttonbriefly.

X To select a track from the track list usingrapid scrolling: press and hold: or9until the desired track is reached.If you press and hold the button, the speed ofrapid scroll increases after a short time. Notall audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If the corresponding track information is storedon the audio player or media, the multifunctiondisplay shows the following:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X To select a DVD single drive or disc:pressa briefly.The list containing the media sourcesappears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.X To open the scene list:press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in thescene list:press the: or9 buttonbriefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list usingrapid scrolling:press and hold: or9until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction


When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system.X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system (see Digital Operator's Man-ual).

X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Telephone menu.


You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐phone menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the names oneafter the other.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold:or9 for longer than one second.The names are displayed quickly one after theother in the phone book.If you press and hold the: or9 buttonfor longer than five seconds, the nameappears with the next or previous letter initialletter in the alphabet.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one telephone num-ber for a particular name:press the6 ora button to display the numbers.

X Press: or9 to select the number youwant to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button briefly.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.


-board

computerand

displays

Assistance graphic menu


X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Assistance Graphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RDistance display of DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 171)RSpotlight function of Night View Assist Plus(Y page 225)RDistance warning and the autonomousbraking function COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 68)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 204)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 198)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 206)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Service menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theService menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 227)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-tem (Y page 352)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 349)

RCalling up the service due date (Y page 318).RChecking the oil level using the on-board com-puter (Y page 314) (S 600, Mercedes-May-bach S 600 and Mercedes-AMG S 65 only)

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu:RChanging assistance settings (Y page 221)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 224)RChanging the light settings (Y page 225)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 225)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 226)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" section inthe description of ESP® (Y page 71).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFor further information about ESP®, see(Y page 71).X Start the engine.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the Settings menu.



On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssistsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to select ESP.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up continuouslywhen the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 261).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 228).

Automatic activation of Night View AssistPlusX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectNight View Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.


If Night View Assist Plus automatic activation isswitched on, the night vision image is automat-ically shown in the multifunction display if anobject is detected (Y page 202).For further information about Night View AssistPlus (Y page 200).

Activating/deactivating Traffic SignAssistUnder certain conditions, the Traffic SignAssist function allows you to choose if trafficsigns and messages should be displayed in thelower part of the speedometer.





X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectTraffic Sign Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.Traffic signs and messages appear in thelower part of the speedometer if the functionis activated.

For further information about Traffic Sign Assist,see (Y page 199).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the9 or: button to select Col‐lision Prevention.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu.For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 68).


-board

computerand

displays

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.


When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-play in the Assistance Graphic menu.For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see(Y page 73).

Activating/deactivating Active Blind SpotAssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,white radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the AssistanceGraphic.

For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 204).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST.X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: or9 to select Off, Standardor Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 198).

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping AssistX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.




X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press the: or9 button to selectLane Keeping Assist.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection, Standard or Adap‐tive, appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 206).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display= Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign AssistUsing the Display Content function, you canchoose from up to four display options depend-ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selectedcontents appear in the Head-up Display.InMercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choosebetween two AMG displays. If you select anAMG display, the Head-up Display shows AMG-specific contents.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Display Con‐tent.X Pressa to confirm.A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired dis-play.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

For further information about the traffic signdisplays, see Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 199).Further information on navigation displays canbe found in the multimedia system (see the Dig-ital Operator's Manual).

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the Head-up Dis-play on the windshield. You can compensate forheight differences if the seat positions arechanged, for example.X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 213).X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.


X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Positionfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press: or9 to adjust the position to alevel from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the set position of theHead-upDisplay asa single memory preset (Y page 120).

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the Head-up Display is auto-matically adjusted to the surrounding ambientlight. You can also individually adjust the bright-ness of the Head-up Display.X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 213).X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Brightnessfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press: or9 to adjust the brightnessto a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5(dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.


-board

computerand

displays

Light submenu

Switching the spotlight function on/offX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Lightssubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSpotlight function.X Press thea button to save the setting.When the spotlight function is activated, theassistance graphic shows the pedestriansymbol.

Further information on the spotlight function(Y page 202).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.



X Use: or9 to select the Lights sub-menu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light in themultifunction display is shown in white andblue.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 124).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer functionallows you to choose whether certain displaysappear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc-tion display.




X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RspeedometerRdigital speedometer in the Trip menuRadditional speedometer in the status area onthe multifunction displayThe unit in the additional speedometer is dis-played inversely to the selected distance unit.Rthe odometer and trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRnavigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go PilotRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometeron/offThe Additional Speedometer [km/h] func-tion allows you to choose whether the statusarea in the multifunction display shows thespeed digitally. The unit in the additional speed-ometer is always inverse to the speedometerunit.X Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Press: or9 to select the Instru‐ment Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm your selection.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again.

Restoring the factory settingsX Pressò on the steering wheel to open themenu list.



X Press: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected and confirmed Yes, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator

? Transmission fluid temperatureA Engine oil temperatureX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine/transmission oil temperature:when the engine and transmission are at nor-mal operating temperature, oil tempera-ture? andA are displayed in white in themultifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? orA in blue, the engine or thetransmission are not yet at normal operatingtemperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-put during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program C, S or M; ESP® mode (ON/OFF)= Suspension setting SPORT or COMFORTX Press theò button on the steering wheelto open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.


X Press the: or9 button until theSETUP display appears.


-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory.Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 178)RParking (Y page 162)

Hiding display messagesX Pressa or% on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority displaymessages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press theò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory.If there are no displaymessages, the No Messagesmessage appears in themultifunction display.When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷ and ! warninglamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays


÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐tion to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignitionwas switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of theelectric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 164).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 164).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 164).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashesand the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-tinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 363).X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 164).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to applythe electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake Inop‐erative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten secondsafter the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It thengoes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only)or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USAonly: the red$ brake systemwarning lamp also lights upwhilethe engine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Restart the engine.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Operator'sManualImportant functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


PRE-SAFE FunctionsLimited See Opera‐tor's ManualPRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualThe radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RDirt on sensorsRHeavy rain or snowRWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioningor is temporarily unavailable:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.A warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving anddrive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-appears.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Switch off the engine.X Clean all sensors (Y page 323).X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

Check Left RearBelt See Operator'sManual or CheckRight Rear Belt SeeOperator's Manual

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The belt strap may be jammedin the belt tongue.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Release the jamming.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt buckle extendermay be jammed.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Move the seat cushion forwards (Y page 102) and remove the causeof the jam.

X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt may be locked.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Completely take off your seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. There is not enough belt slackin the system.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Loosen the seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear compart-ment is not in the predefined position. The assistance measuresspecified have been carried out. There is still a malfunction.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp alsolights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42).

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position, theseat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Perform the specified assistance measures when display messageCheck Left Rear Belt See Operator's Manual or CheckRight Rear Belt See Operator's Manual is shown(Y page 235).

If the display message does not disappear:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required orRight Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey,even though:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 51).

Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamps light up simultaneouslyfor approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51)Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see(Y page 51).


-board

computerand

displays

Lights


bCheck Left Low Beam(Example)

The bulb in question is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 128).

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bMalfunction SeeOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

bSwitch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.X Turn the light switch to position L orÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Inoper‐ativeAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inop-erative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is available again.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine


+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 316).

If you have to add coolant frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine coolingsystem checked.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning.X At coolant temperatures below 257‡ (125†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 257 ‡ (125 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.If the temperature increases again:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).


-board

computerand

displays


#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running

The battery condition of charge is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running.X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

#Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance.The battery is being charged.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 314).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 315).If you have to add engine oil frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)(USA) Check EngineOil Level (Add 1Liter) (Canada)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 314).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 315).If you have to add engine oil frequently:X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the enginechecked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualifiedspecialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 314).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 315).

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays

Driving systems


ÀATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-cle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Malfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-teristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ABC MalfunctionStop Vehicle The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the displaymessage disappears.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.The vehicle is leaking oil.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The multifunction display continuously shows the display message.Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fenderor the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC Vehicle RisingPlease Wait Briefly The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warningtone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

ABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle'shandling characteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane KeepingAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the windshield.


-board

computerand

displays


Active Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


Active Blind SpotAssist Inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with thedriver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 186).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 186).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbol isnot shown in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Park AssistSwitched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

Night View AssistCurrently Unavaila‐bleNight View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View AssistInoperative Night View Assist Plus is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Spotlight Inopera‐tive Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the system will switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 178).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 171).

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171).

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.



On-board

computerand

displays

Z


DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioningThe following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171).

DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirtyRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Cruise Control- - - mphRA condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam-ple.RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

orX Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 169).orX Reactivate ESP® (Y page 221).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 169).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire PressureSoon Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant lossin pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installednew wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 327).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-sure is correct (Y page 352).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorCanada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display messageand has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 352).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 349).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 351).


-board

computerand

displays


Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.



X Check the tire pressure (Y page 349).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.



Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart EngineWith the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling AwayThe driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Sta‐tionaryThe vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.


-board

computerand

displays


Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit DealerYou cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possi‐ble Service Required You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cool‐ing

The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarilyimpaired or not possible.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

To view the ext.mirror, adjustfront-passengerseat or remove thehead restraint.

The front-passenger seat is in the chauffeur mode position and thehead restraint is folded down.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is in the chauffeur mode position and thehead restraint is folded down, the view of the front-passenger exteriormirror can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Remove the head restraint on the front-passenger seat(Y page 108).

orX Move the front-passenger seat back into the normal position(Y page 106).

Front-PassengerSeat Cannot Be UsedVisit WorkshopRThe front-passenger seat cannot be moved from the chauffeurmode position into the normal position. There is a malfunction.RThe front passenger head restraint is folded down and can no longerbe folded up. There is a malfunction.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. inthe event of an accident or when braking.X Do not use the front-passenger seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

nBefore oper. front-pass. seat fromrear, deactiv. over‐ride feature.

You have attempted to adjust the front-passenger seat from the rearcompartment while the override feature is activated.X Deactivate the override feature for the rear side windows(Y page 65).

X Adjust the front-passenger seat from the rear.


-board

computerand

displays


ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 317).

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.a warning tone soundsX Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged.X Change the battery (Y page 80).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver'sdoor with the engine switched off. a warning tone soundsThis display message is displayed in the multifunction display for amaximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, theSmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicatorand warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems



$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J÷!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellowESP® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine isrunning.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelObserve the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 71).

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays



å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelObserve the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 71).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.

F! NF (USA only) or! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine



; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legalrequirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legalregulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolanttemperature gauge is at the beginning of the cold range.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be defective.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 316).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257 ‡(125 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 ‡ (124 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 316).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



X At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡ (125 †), you can continue driving to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 73).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 68).


-board

computerand

displays

Tires



h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 162).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 327).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 349).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) flashes for approximately oneminute andthen remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle



Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If you are unable to steer safely:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-tor's Manual describes the basic principles foroperation. More information can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-ever, it is recommended to install it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between theradiation source and a person's body (notincluding limbs such as hands, wrists, feet andlegs).

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

Function restrictions 269

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Operating system

Overview

General notesWearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press theÜ button on the center consoleto the right of the controller.When you switch themultimedia system on, awarning message will appear. The multimediasystem calls up the previously selectedmenu.If you switch the multimedia system off, play-back of the current media source will also beswitched off.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-troller.

orX Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.The volume of the media source currentlyselected changes.

The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the thumbwheel beside the controller.orX Press the8 button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switchthe media source or change the volume, thesound is automatically switched on.

i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS WeatherRVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functionsRMulti-Seat Entertainment System

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.

270 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

The telephone keypad or touchpadThemultimedia system is equipped with either atelephone keypad or a touchpad.The telephone keypad is touch-sensitive. Assoon as one or several of the keys are gentlytouched, the telephone keypad is shown in themultimedia system's display. The key beingtouched is highlighted.As an alternative to the controller, the touchpadenables menu items to be selected and charac-ter entry including handwriting recognition, forexample.

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQTouchpadQActivate Touch‐pad.The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.

Operating the touchpadThe touchpad is available in two versions.

Variant 1: Touch-sensitive surface; Favorites button

= Quick access for audio? Back button

Variant 2: Touch-sensitive surface; Favorites button= Calls up quick access for audio and tele-

phone? Back buttonNavigating in menus and lists can be done viatouch-sensitive surface: by swiping withyour finger.X To select themenu item: swipe up, down, tothe left or right.

X Press the touchpad.X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc-tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func-tion:X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe upor down with two fingers.

X To increase or reduce the vehicle andsound settings: turn two fingers to the rightor left.

X To zoom in and out of the map: move twofingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec-ognition

Entering charactersX Use one finger to write characters on the sur-face.The character is entered in the input line. Ifthe character that you have entered can be

Operating system 271

Multim

ediasystem

Z

interpreted in different ways, these charactersuggestions are displayed.

X If character suggestions are shown, turn andpress the controller.

X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

: Active input line; To insert a space= Character entered on the touchpad? To delete charactersX To display the menu: press the touchpad.

: To exit the menu; To return to handwriting recognition= To use the phone book or text templates? To select the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursorA To switch the languageB To finish character entryX To select the input line: selectp.X Swipe up or down.X To move the cursor within the input line:selectp.

X Swipe to the left or right.X To delete characters: swipe to the left if aninput line is selected.

X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of thehandwriting recognition on/offMultimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQTouchpadQRead Out Hand‐writing Recognition.The read-aloud function is switched on O oroff ª.

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currentlyactivated, you can use this function to select thenext station or music track.X Swipe upwards on the touchpad with two fin-gers.The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/music track: glide to the right or left.The selected station/music track is played.

Quick access for telephone

Sending DTMF tonesRequirement: the touchpad is equipped withversion 2.The function is not supported by all mobilephones (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).X Swipe upwards on the touchpad with two fin-gers during a phone call.Quick access is displayed.

X To select characters: glide your finger to theleft or right and press.Every character selected will be transmittedimmediately.


ediasystem

Switching the character entry betweentouchpad and controllerPrerequisite: an input line for text, numbers orcharacters has been selected.X To switch to the controller: press the con-troller.Character entry using the controller is active.

X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch-pad with your finger.Handwriting recognition on the touchpad isactive.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theg button on the con-troller or on the touchpad.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theg button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theg button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notesYou have the following options for adjusting cli-mate control settings:Rusing the climate control barRusing the climate control menuYou can set the most important climate controlfunctions such as temperature, airflow and airdistribution using the climate control bar. Theclimate control bar is visible in most displays.You can find all the climate control functions inthe climate control menu. You can use the cli-mate control bar to switch to the climate controlmenu.

OverviewYou can set the most important climate controlfunctions directly in the climate control bar andchange them in the climate control menu.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

: Adjusts temperature, airflow and air distri-bution, left, as well as displaying the currentsetting

; Calls up the climate control menu, displaysthe current cooling and climate mode set-ting

= Adjusts air distribution, airflow and temper-ature on the right and displays the currentsettings

There may be fewer settings or none dependingon your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control barMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.

Calling up the climate control menuMultimedia system:X Select Vehicle.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until theclimate control bar is activated.

X To select from climate control bar;: turnand press the controller.The menu for selecting climate control func-tions is activated.

X To select a climate function: turn and pressthe controller.The selected climate control functionappears.

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThe climate mode determines the type of air-flow. When the air-conditioning system is set toÃ, the setting is active (Y page 136).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectClimate Mode: turn and press thecontroller.

X To change sides: slide the controller left8 or right9

X To change the setting: turn the controller.X To exit the menu: press the% button.The climate mode bar displays the current air-flow setting: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS.Starting/stopping the perfume atomizerThe perfume atomizermakes it possible to scentthe air in individual compartments in the vehicleinterior. Further information (Y page 141).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectAir Freshener: turn and press thecontroller.The setting element is active.

X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: pressthe controller.

X To set the intensity: turn the controller whenthe atomizer is switched on.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Switching the ionization on/offThe ionization has a cleansing effect on the air inthe vehicle interior. Further information(Y page 142).X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectIonization: turn and press thecontroller.The setting element is active.

X To switch the ionization on or off: turn thecontroller.


Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-mate control via the SmartKeyThis function is only available forPLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles.


ediasystem

PLUG‑INHYBRID: before getting in, the driver'sseat area or the whole vehicle interior is brieflywarmed or ventilated. The air from the vents ispre-cooled.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectPre-entry Climate Controlvia Key: turn and press the controller.

X To activate or deactivate: turn the control-ler.


Activating or deactivating pre-entry cli-mate control at departure timeThis function is available for PLUG‑IN HYBRIDvehicles.The driver's seat and the vehicle interior areheated or cooled prior to the set departure time.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectPre-entry Climate Ctrl. atDeparture Time: turn and press the control-ler.A rotary menu appears.

X To select the setting: turn the controller.The menu symbol, text and image show theselected setting.


Adjusting the footwell temperatureX Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X To selectAdjust Footwell: turn and pressthe controller.

X To change sides: slide1 the controller.X To change the setting: turn the controller.X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli-mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica-tion on/offi Activating the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation facilitates the cooling of the vehicleinterior even with high outside temperatures.

X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To selectO A/C: turn and press the con-troller.

X The cooling with air dehumidification functionis activated O or deactivated ª.

i The current status of the cooling function isdisplayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON– activated, A/C OFF – deactivated.

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set-tingsUse O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli-mate control setting for all zones together O orseparately ª.X Call up the climate control menu(Y page 274).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until thebottom bar is activated.

X To selectO Sync: turn and press the con-troller.

X The synchronization function is activated Oor deactivated ª.

With the synchronization function switched off,you can alternate between driver and frontpassenger.X To switch from the footer to the main area:slide5 the controller.

X To switch between left and right: slide1the controller.Not all climate control functions allow switch-ing between the driver and front passenger.

For further information on synchronizing climatecontrol settings, see (Y page 138).

Navigation mode


G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted from


Multim

ediasystem

Z

traffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Further information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select QRoute Settings.X Select a route type.Notes for route types:REco RouteCalculates an economic route.RDynamic Traffic RouteTraffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account (only available inthe USA).RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. Insteadof Start, select the Continue menu item.

X To avoid/use route options: select AvoidOptions.

X Select a route option.X WhenUse Toll Roads is selected, select thepayment type.

Notes for route options:RUse Toll Roads

The route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in theUSA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRcountry, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for free destination searchThe free destination search finds destinationsusing fragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destination


ediasystem

You can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐tination.Yes cancels the current route guidance andstarts route calculation to the new destina-tion.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

RequirementsFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above. You can also connect your mobilephone via NFC (Near FieldCommunication) withthe multimedia system. For more information(see the Digital Operator's Manual).Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobile

phone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRMessages

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centeron 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobilephoneBefore using your mobile phone without NFCwith the multimedia system, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize it.Depending on the mobile phone, authorizationeither takes place by means of Secure SimplePairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimediasystem automatically makes the procedure thatis relevant for your mobile phone available. Themobile phone is always connected automati-cally after authorization. Further information onusing a mobile phone with the multimedia sys-tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneMultimedia system:X Select PhoneQConnect Device.X Select Search for Phones.X Select Start Search.The available mobile phones are displayed inthe device list.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (pass-code):X Select mobile phone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Selectb.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select PhoneQConnect Device.X Select mobile phone.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)RCDRDVD videoRSD cardsRAUX cableRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on the DVD changer or singleDVD drive (see the Digital Operator's Man-ual).

Using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing an SD card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.


ediasystem

Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, youshould remove it and store it outside the vehi-cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD cardThe SD card slot is located in the stowage com-partment under the armrest.X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot untilthe SD card engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

X Select the media source (Y page 278).

Removing an SD cardX Press the memory card.The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devices

Connections in the storage compartment underthe armrest in vehicles without rear climate control

Connections in the storage compartment underthe armrest in vehicles with rear climate control

There are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 278).

Connecting to an external audio/videosourceThe socket for the audio/video AUX jack is loca-ted in the stowage compartment in the centerconsole.To connect an external audio source to the AUXjack, an audio AUX cable is required. To connectan external video source, a video AUX cable isrequired.X Connect the video/audio AUX cable to theAUX jack.

X Select the media source (Y page 278).X Start playback of the external audio/videosource (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

i Videos cannot be shown on the driver's sidewhile the vehicle is in motion.

CD/DVD drive (Rear Seat Entertain-ment System)

: CD/DVD slot; CD/DVD eject buttonDepending on the vehicle model and equipmentlevel, the CD/DVD drive is found:Rat the rear of the center console under theautomatic climate control panel orRbetween the parcel shelf and skibag


Multim

ediasystem

Z

AUX jacks (Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem)

: AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal(red)

; AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal(white)

= AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)Depending on the vehicle model and equipmentlevel, the AUX jacks are found:Rin the stowage box between the rear seats orRin the rear-compartment armrest.

USB ports (Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem)

: USB port 1; USB port 2Depending on the vehicle model and equipmentlevel, the USB ports are found:Rin the stowage box between the rear seats orRin the rear-compartment armrest.


ediasystem

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines


G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 281).

Stowage areas 281

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

The glove box contains:Ra coin holderRa pen holderRthree credit card holdersRa holder for the multimedia system remotecontrol

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key (Y page 79).X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise toposition1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartments in the center con-sole

Stowage compartment in the center console(example: Mercedes‑Maybach)X To open: briefly press marking;.X To close: push stowage compartment: inthe direction of the arrow until it engages.

282 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: or; and fold thearmrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be in the stowage space:Ran AUX-IN jackRa multimedia connector unit with USB port,e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® orMP3 player (see theDigital Operator's Manual)

Stowage compartments in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled up fluores-cent jacket and a small umbrella in stowagecompartment; in the doors.In doors: you can store bottles with a capacityof up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull handle: and fold the armrests upwards.

Vehicleswith electrically adjustable outer seats:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-com-partment center console

Stowage areas 283

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rearX Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be installed in the rear compart-ment:Ra USB portRan AUX-IN jackRa mobile phone bracketRa 115 V socket

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight onthe rear seat armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Vehicleswith electrically adjustable outer seats:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rear:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVDplayer is installed instead of a stowage com-partment.

Folding tableG WARNINGIf the folding table is folded out while the vehi-cle is in motion, passengers can be thrownagainst it, particularly in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or a sudden change ofdirection. There is a risk of injury.Fold the folding table away before each jour-ney.

X To fold out: open rear armrest:(Y page 283).

X Pull the folding table forwards and upwards byrecess; or= and swing outwards.

X Fold the table panels apart.X To fold in: fold the table panels together andswing in the folding table.


ageandfeatures

Stowage netsStowage nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the trunkObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 281)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 281).

Skibag


G WARNINGThe skibag in conjunction with the lashingstraps cannot restrain any objects other thanskis.Vehicle occupants could be struck in theevent of sudden braking or an accident, forinstance, if you:Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edgedobjects in the skibagRdo not secure the skibag with the lashingstraps

There is a risk of accident and injury.Store only skis in the skibag. Always securethe skibag with the lashing straps so that itcannot move around.

Observe the following points when using theskibag:Rdo not transport more than three pairs of skisin the skibag.Rwhen carefully sliding the skis into or remov-ing them from the skibag, mind the sharpedges and corners of the skis.Rstow the skis as described in the following:

- when sliding the skis in, position the run-ning surfaces of the respective pair of skistogether.

- position one pair of skis at the bottom withthe tips of the skis pointing to the outside.

- position the two additional pairs of skis onthe left and right-hand sides above thelower pair of skis. The tips of the skis beingoffset by 90° to the tips of the skis below.

Unfolding the skibag and loading skis

Vehicles with a rear bench seat

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seatsX Vehicles with electrically adjustableouter seats: fully retract the center headrestraint (Y page 111).

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Stowage areas 285

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z


Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seatsX Release the Velcro fasteners on skibag:.X Pull skibag: into the vehicle interior andunfold it.

X Open the trunk lid.

X Pull handle: on the flap.X Fold the flap to the side until it is held in placeby the magnet.

X Slide the skis into the skibag from the trunk.

X Pull strap: tight by the loose end until theskis are held firmly inside the skibag.


Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seatsX Engage hook; in securing ring=.X Pull tensioning strap? tight by the looseend.

Removing skis and foldingup the skibagX Release lashing strap:.X Loosen tensioning strap?.X Remove hook; from securing ring=.X Take the skis carefully out of the skibag fromthe trunk.


ageandfeatures

X Close the flap in the trunk.X Fold up the skibag using the folding aid andclose it with the Velcro fasteners.

X Put the skibag into the backrest.X Fold the cover back up.You should close the flap in the trunk if you donot require the skibag. This will prevent unau-thorized access to the trunk from the vehicleinterior.

Removing the skibag

If you would like to clean or dry the skibag, it canbe removed.X Open the trunk.X Open flap:.X Release the skibag at catch; and remove.When the skibag has been removed, you can usethe through-loading facility for stowing loads.

Bag hook in the trunk

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to securea load.

X Pull bag hook; down by tab:.

EASY-PACK trunk box


G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is exten-ded, objects may neither be placed on theframe of the box nor pushed down onto theframe from above. The box may otherwise bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects candamage the EASY-PACK trunk box andmay bethrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside the EASY-PACKtrunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects may bethrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box andstrike vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always observe the maximum permitted loadof the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store

Stowage areas 287

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

and secure heavy objects in the trunk outsidethe EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACKtrunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of aboveapproximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of thebox moves downwards until it rests on the matof the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box isavoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

ExampleX Pull the box out by handle: in the directionof the arrow as far as it will go.

X To lower the load surface: push down withyour hand in the center of load surface; inthe direction of the arrow until load sur-face; has reached the desired position.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by han-dle: as far as it will go.

Removing and installing

Example

X To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=.

ExampleX Raise box: and press hooksA into anchor-age? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating catchBclockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchBclockwise and right-hand rotating catchBcounter-clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it out fromanchorages?.

Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surfaceafter removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.

Securing loads using parcel net hooks

General notesObserve the following notes on securing loads:RSecure the load using the parcel net hooksRDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.


ageandfeatures

Trunk

There are up to four parcel net hooks in the trunkdepending on the equipment installed.

Stowage well under the trunk floor

X To open: open the trunk lid.X Press handle; on the ribbing downwards.Handle; folds upwards.

X Swing trunk floor: upwards using handle;until it rests against the trunk partition.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of thetrunk floor.

X Clip hook= into groove?.X To close: unclip hook= from groove?.X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the under-side of the trunk floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

Roof carrier


G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 376).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse roof carriers that have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to avoid damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in such away that the vehicle will not sustain damageeven when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel fully and openthe trunk lid fully when the roof carrier isinstalled.

Stowage areas 289

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,do not use metallic or hard objects to openthem.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof loadmay become detached from the vehicle. Youmust therefore ensure that you observe the roofcarrier manufacturer's installation instructions.Vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if aroof carrier is installed. The panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel can still be raised toallow ventilation of the vehicle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel makes contact with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof willlower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Fold covers: upwards in the direction of thearrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchoragepoints under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot always

retain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 281).Mercedes-Maybach vehicles equipped withchampagne glasses: for your own safety, whenusing champagne glasses, please observe thefollowing:Rdo not use the champagne glasses while thevehicle is in motionRdo not use champagne glasses made ofbreakable glass, and store them in the trunk ifpossible

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Cup holder in the front center console

Front cupholder (example: Mercedes‑Maybach)

290 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 282).

X Open the protective flap if necessary.X To remove: slide catch: forwards and pullthe cup holder upwards.

X To insert: make sure that the protective flapis closed.

X Insert the cup holder and slide catch: back.You can remove the cup holder and the rubbermat for cleaning. Clean them with clean, luke-warm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat! Close the cup holder before folding the rearseat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holdercould be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back untilit engages.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press down base; of the cupholder in the middle until it engages.

X To close: press closing button:.Base; of cup holder pops up.

The cup holder insert can be removed for clean-ing. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

! Do not pull out the cup holder insert anyfurther than 0.6 in (15 mm). Otherwise, thewooden trimon the rear seat armrest could bedamaged.

X To remove the insert: press downbase= ofthe cup holder in the middle until it engages.

X Press both retaining clips; and pull the cupholder insert upwards approximately 0.6 in(15 mm).

X Press button:.Base= of cup holder pops up.

X Remove the insert from the rear seat armrestcompletely.

! Make sure that the cup holder insert hasbeen inserted into the recess correctly. Oth-erwise, the wooden trim on the rear seat arm-rest could be damaged.

Features 291

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To install the insert:make sure that base;of the cup holder is in the upper position.

X Place the cup holder insert into the recess inthe rear seat armrest such that button: isfacing forwards.

X Press the cup holder insert down.X Press outer ring= of the cup holder insert,until the cup holder insert engages audibly.

Temperature controlled cup holder inthe rear compartment

Example: Sedan: Cup holder; SwitchThe temperature-controlled cup holder can beused to keep cold drinks cold and hot drinks hot.When you use the warming function, the metalinsert of the cup holder is heated. Therefore, donot touch the cup holder insert.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To switch on the cooling function: pressand hold button; until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button; until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton; until the indicator lamp on the but-ton goes out.

The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Additional sun visor= Bracket? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticketA Vanity mirrorB Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into retainer= and mirror coverB hasbeen folded up.

292 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Glare from the sideX Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of bracket=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor; to the wind-shield.

Rear side window roller sunblinds

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftThe sunblinds for the rear side windows can beoperated with the buttons for the side windows.The switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.X To close fully:pull the corresponding switchwhen the side window is closed.

X To open fully:press the correspondingswitch.

i You can use the switches on the rear doorsto close the rear roller sunblinds for the oppo-site side.

Rear window roller sunblind


G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening orclosing process is briefly stopped. The rollersunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind can movefreely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or otherobjects could be damaged.

At temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) the rollersunblind cannot be operated.

Extending/retracting from the driver'sseat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To extendor retract: briefly press button:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Features 293

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Extending/retracting from the rear

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

X To extend: pull switch: upwards and let go.The roller sunblind extends fully.

X To stop extending: press switch: down-wards briefly.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenretracts again.

X To retract: press switch: downwardsbeyond the point of resistance and let go.The roller sunblind retracts fully.

X To stop retracting: pull switch: up.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenextends again.

When the override feature for the rear side win-dows is activated (Y page 65), theu switchcannot be operated. The roller sunblind can onlybe extended and retracted from the driver'sseat.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

Front ashtray (example: Mercedes‑Maybach)

X To open: briefly press marking?.Stowage compartment= opens.

X To remove the insert: grip the sides ofinsert:, push it forward and pull itupwards;.

X To re-install the insert: press insert: intothe drawer until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartment=closed until it locks.

Rear compartment ashtray

The ashtray is located in the stowage compart-ment in the rear door. To use it, you can place itin a cup holder or hold it in your hand.X Remove the ashtray from retainer: in therear door.

X To open: fold lid; upwards.X To close: press lid; downwards.If you are not using the ashtray, close it andplace it in the retainer in the rear door.

Cigarette lighter


G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

294 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

Front cigarette lighter (example:Mercedes‑Maybach)X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment; opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartment;closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter in the rear compart-ment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Vehicleswithout a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-temX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.


X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.


X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

Features 295

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: SedanX Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front center console

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment: opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: press stowage compartment:closed until it locks.

Socket in the rear compartment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Vehicleswithout a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-temX To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.

296 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until it locks.On vehicles with a 115 V socket, there is no 12V socket in the center console in the rear com-partment.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: SedanX Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket


G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

Features 297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,must notconsume more than a maximum of 150 wattsaltogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has asuitable connector and conforms to stand-ards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-sible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the center console in thefront compartment (Y page 296) and in thetrunk are functional (Y page 297).

Using the 115 V power socket

The 115 V socket is in the center console in therear compartment on vehicles with a rear benchseat or electrically adjustable rear seats.X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

The 115 V socket is in the armrest on vehicleswith individual seats in the rear.X Open the armrest (Y page 283).X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

298 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems with the 115 V power socket


The warning lamp on the115 V power socket isnot lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 334).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominalpower of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Coolbox in the rear compartment


G WARNINGIf you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire.Always make sure that the ventilation grille isnot covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in thetrunk.The coolbox can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb(3.5 kg).If you want to store a bottle in the upper com-partment of the coolbox, the capacity of thebottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).Store only plastic bottles in the upper compart-ment of the coolbox.

Using the coolbox

X Vehicles with rear seat armrest: fold downthe rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Features 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: pull handle: on the cover.X Fold the cover out to the front.X To switch cooling level to low: press but-ton; once.An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: press but-ton; twice.Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button;repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends onthe ambient temperature and the selected cool-ing level.The coolbox reduces its cooling output orswitches off, if:Rmany electrical consumers are turned onRthe starter battery is not sufficiently chargedThis is indicated by the flashing indicator lampsin the button. The cooling function will automat-ically switch back on as soon as there is suffi-cient voltage.

Caring for the coolboxIf you do not need to use the coolbox for anextended period you should switch it off, defrostit and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid openfor a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

You can remove the coolbox for maintenancepurposes or to install the skibag (Y page 285).X To remove: switch off the coolbox.X Pull plug; down and out.X Unscrew both screws=.X Pull out the coolbox.X Close flap:.X To install: swing flap: to the side until it islocked in place by the magnets.

X Insert the coolbox.X Tighten both screws=.X Connect plug;.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To register, pressthe ï Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.

300 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the multimedia system volume control.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRInfo callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call buttondoes not light up during the system self-diag-nosis

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- Info call buttonïRafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ative or Service Not Activatedmessageappears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Service Center or contact thefollowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 300).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

Features 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing SOS button;, you do not know ifmbrace has successfully made the emergencycall. In this case, always summon assistance byother means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-ton:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the

302 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 306).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest Mercedes-BenzService Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Info call button

X To call: press Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Center and about other products and serv-ices from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Features 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call buttonis flashing continuouslyRno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or Info calls, an emergency call canstill be initiated. In this case, an emergency callwill take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

304 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be valet locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:

Features 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anInfo call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐nected message in the display. If the VehicleHealth Check can be started, the Request forVehicle Diagnostics Received Startvehicle diagnostics? message appears inthe display.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 145).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins. Youwill see the Vehicle Diagnostics Activemessage.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 31).

306 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 28).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message onthe multimedia system display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call andnotify the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo-fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garage

Features 307

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 29).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.


Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 308).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-gramed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The rolling codemust be synchronized (Y page 309).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.

308 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 308).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".

Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA again for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofremote controlA for the garage door drive.

Features 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The garage door opener is compatible withdevices which operate in the frequency rangeof 280 to 433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from but-tons; to?which you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle butat varying distances.RIf another remote controlA is available forthe same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote controlA. Before performing these steps,make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats


X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slidethe respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the corresponding frontseat forwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers; until youhear them engage.

310 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehi-cle interior frombecoming too hot. It also blocksradio waves from penetrating the windshield upinto the gigahertz range.In order to operate radio-controlled equipment,e.g. toll recording systems, areas: on thewindshield are permeable to radio waves. Youcan install radio-controlled devices in theseareas.These areas can best be seen from outside thevehicle by observing the light reflected off thewindshield.

Features 311

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.


G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate operating instructions. You could oth-erwise fail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to highvoltage.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

312 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator, such as with athermal mat or insect protection cover. Thereadings of the on-board-diagnostic systemmayotherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read-ings are required by law andmust be accurate atall times.

Engine oil



G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.

Engine compartment 313

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate operating instructions. You could oth-erwise fail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to highvoltage.

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surfaceRthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperatureRif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick (except S 600 and Mercedes-AMGS 65)

Example: checking the oil level using the oildipstick

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (S 600 and Mercedes-AMG S 65)

Calling up the oil level checkX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 145).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.


X Use: or9 to select the Engine OilLevel submenu.X Pressa to confirm the selection.The Measuring Engine Oil Level Accu‐rate Only When Vehicle Is Level mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display. Themessages are described in the following chap-ter.


andcare

Oil level display messages in the multifunction displayDisplay messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Engine Oil Level OK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 Liter)The oil level is too low.X Add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine OilLevelThe engine oil level is too high.X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilLevel Ignition MustBe OnThe ignition is switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145).orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice(Y page 145).

Need More Time toCheck Engine OilLevelThe required waiting period was not observed.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat the meas-urement after about five minutes.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement afterapproximately 30 minutes.

Engine Oil LevelNot Measurable withEngine RunningThe engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about fiveminutes before carrying out the measurement.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicleswith a service system. Alist of the engine oils and oil filters that havebeen tested and approved in accordance withMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The following cause engine failure or damageto the exhaust system:RUse of engine oils and oil filters that havenot been expressly approved for the servicesystemRReplacement of engine oil and oil filter afterthe replacement interval specified by theservice system has expiredRUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.


Maintenance

andcare

Z

Example: adding engine oilX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level using the on-board com-puter (except S 600 andMercedes-AMGS65)(Y page 314).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 373).

Additional service products



G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.


Checking coolant level


G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,


andcare

you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

Example: checking the coolant levelX Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 145).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 145).

X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster (Y page 211).The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).


orX Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO (Y page 145).

X Slowly turn cap: counter-clockwise and torelieve excess pressure.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 374).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: adding fluid to the windshieldwasher system

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Place cap: on the edge of the filler neck andengage in place.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l),a message appears in the multifunction displayprompting you to addwasher fluid (Y page 257).Further information on washer fluid(Y page 375).


Maintenance

andcare

Z

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).Further information can be obtained at a quali-fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 314).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in XX DaysRService A DueRService A Overdue by XX DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch the ignition on.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up thelist of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu and confirm witha.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con-firm witha.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter

318 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

replaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.


! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closedRthe blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged


! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in neutral position N when washing yourvehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehiclemay otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's doorwhen the engine is switched off or at very

Care 319

Maintenance

andcare

Z

low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis-sion position D or R the automatic trans-mission will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmissionwill automatically switch to park position Pand block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in positionN neu-tral:Operating with the SmartKey:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Engage park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 145).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if neces-sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. This

will prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.RElectrical components

320 CareMaintenance

andcare

RBatteryRConnectorsRLampsRSealsRTrimRVentilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.


Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which hasbeen recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt haspenetrated the paint surface.Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has becomedull.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for thepurpose of paintwork care. These productsare only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Theiruse on vehicles with matte paintwork leads toconsiderable surface damage or, more spe-cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.The vehicle should ideally be washed by handusing a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty ofwater.Use only insect remover and car shampoo fromthe range of approved Mercedes-Benz careproducts.

Care 321

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can lead

to corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield (Y page 129).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lightswith a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

322 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360°camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera or 360° camerawith a power washer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 145).

orX Press the Start/Stop button once or twice onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 145).

X Open the camera cover for cleaning via themultimedia system; see Digital Operator'sManual.

X To clean the camera: use clean water and asoft cloth to clean the camera lens:.

The camera cover closes automatically:Rif you are driving at speeds above 6 mph(10 km/h)Rif the ignition is switched off

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.

Care 323

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

Cleaning the camera behind the wind-shield! Never clean the camera lens.When cleaningthe field of vision of the driving systems,makesure that you do not spray glass cleaner onthe camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield infront of camera;.

Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim

Camera lens: is cleaned at regular intervals byoperating the windshield washer system.X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens: when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

324 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure thatthe appearance and comfort of the covers isretained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of

Care 325

Maintenance

andcare

Z

an accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

326 CareMaintenance

andcare

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor.Some tools for changing a wheel are specific tothe vehicle. For more information on which tirechanging tools are required and approved toperform awheel change on your vehicle, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Necessary tire-changing tools can include, forexample:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire sealant filler bottle; Tire inflation compressor= Towing eyeX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 289).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 329).

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

: Tire sealant filler bottle; Jack= Ratchet? Alignment boltA Jacking supportB SocketC Lug wrenchD Towing eyeE Folding wheel chockF Tire inflation compressorThe tire-change tool kit is in a tray in the stowagewell under the trunk floor.X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 289).i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Rtires with run-flat characteristics(MOExtended tires) (Y page 328)Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 327)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 362).

Flat tire 327

Breakdow

nassistance

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 162).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 145).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 147).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 357).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warningsystem or with an active tire pressure monitor.

If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 252).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fullyladen it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RVehicle speedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tires).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.

328 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Residue from the tire sealant may come outof the filler hose after use. This could causestains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kitX Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflationcompressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 327).

Flat tire 329

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with cable and hoseA outof the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.

X Insert plug? into cigarette lighter socket(Y page 294) or into another 12 V socket ofthe vehicle (Y page 296).


X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to position I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 331).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 330).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the

330 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tiresealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must beaffixed to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Orcall 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side or the tire pressure table inthe fuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release buttonEnext to pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose isunscrewed.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soonas possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Flat tire 331

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery – important safety notesHybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate Operator's Manual. You could other-wise fail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to highvoltage.Special tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS (Y page 66)and ESP® (Y page 71).Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

All vehicles:

332 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contactwith skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physicianif necessary.Electrolyte is corrosive. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Immediately rinse electrolytesplashes off with clean water. Con-tact a physician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.

Battery (vehicle) 333

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.

High-voltage battery – importantsafety notes

G DANGERThe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ifyou wish to leave your vehicle parked for a longperiod of time.

Charging the 12 V batteryMercedes-AMG vehicles:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.4 V.

All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 335).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 335).

334 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not

light up, it is highly likely that the dischargedbattery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Mercedes-AMG vehicles:Do not charge a battery which has beenremoved at low temperatures with a batterycharger. Allow the battery to warm up gentlyfirst, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life canbe shortened and the starting characteristicsimpaired, especially at low temperatures.

Jump-starting

Hybrid vehicles:make sure that you read the separate Operator'sManual. You could otherwise failto recognize dangers, e.g. due to high voltage.For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

Jump-starting 335

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge thebattery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.All vehicles:

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RAll vehicles exceptMercedes-AMGvehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Letthe battery thaw first.RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 145).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

336 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Example: ground point coverX Turn fasteners: oneÕ turn and remove.X Remove the cover while pressing down on cap; of the washer fluid reservoir.

Position numberD identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide coverC of positive terminal= in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal= on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryD using thejumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal= on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryD to ground pointB of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryD first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointB and negative terminalA, then from pos-itive clamp= and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X After removing the jumper cables, close coverC of positive terminal=.X Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positioned pre-cisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press fasteners: into the mountings. Turn the fasteners byÕ of a turn to engage.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Jump-starting 337

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notesHybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate operating instructions. You could oth-erwise fail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to highvoltage.

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 370).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance PilotDISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated,the vehicle brakes automatically in certainsituations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake isreleased. If the electric parking brake is faulty,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towingeye only. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbecome damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-poses as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to N anddo not open the driver's or front passenger'sdoor during towing. The automatic transmis-sion may otherwise shift to position P, whichcould damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.If the automatic transmission cannot be shiftedto position N, have the vehicle transported on atransporter or trailer.

338 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 84). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can betowed out of that area with both axles on theground. In this case, the towing distance mustnot be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must notexceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). Forlonger distances, have the vehicle loaded andtransported.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

The brackets for the screw-in towing eye arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rear andat the front, under covers:.

X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit or the stowage tray (Y page 327).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and press untilit engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit orthe stowage tray.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 338).The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic transmis-sion stays in positionNwhen towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X You must use the SmartKey instead of theStart/Stop button (Y page 145).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 126).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resetting

Towing and tow-starting 339

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

the combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

General notes

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded upand transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle isdamaged, have the vehicle transported on atruck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical sys-tem: if the battery is defective, the automatictransmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shiftthe automatic transmission to position N, youmust provide power to the vehicle's electricalsystem in the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 335).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

i Information on "Jump-starting"(Y page 335).

Fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart isin the vehicle document wallet.

340 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

Before changing a fuseObserve the important safety notes(Y page 340)X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 145).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 145).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 162).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk

Dashboard fuse boxThe fuse box is under a cover on the side of thedashboard. You can obtain further informationfrom an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well

X Open the front-passenger door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

X Open the hood (Y page 312).X To open: release retaining clamps: andremove cover;.

Fuses 341

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X Undo screws= on the fuse box.X Remove fuse box cover? forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-rectly in cover?.

X Insert cover? at the rear of the fuse box intothe retainer.

X Fold down cover? of the fuse box andtighten screws=.

X Insert cover; and secure with retainingclamps:.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk

Fuse box cover (example: Mercedes‑Maybach)X Open the trunk lid.X Prise open cover: with a flat object at thetop right and top left-hand side.

X Open cover: downwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

342 FusesBreakdow

nassistance


G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Information on the sizes and types ofwheels andtires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 367).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar (Y page 353)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 162)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 346)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure.Pay particular attention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpunctures in the tires

Operation 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 344). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 346).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 328).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure loss warning

344 OperationWheelsandtires

system or with an active tire pressure monitorand on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 328).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 362).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 349).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 351).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 367).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.

Winter operation 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 31 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 182) orMagic Body Control (MBC) (Y page 180), youmust drive at raised vehicle level if snowchains have been mounted.RIf snow chains have been mounted, you mustnot use Active Parking Assist (Y page 186).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 71)when pulling away with snow chains mounted.You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-

cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 353).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

346 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 357).

If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.

Tire pressure 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it istoo low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap(Y page 162)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 346).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.


Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 346).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar (Y page 353)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 162)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto thevalve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 346).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire is

shown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 350).


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level to

Tire pressure 349

Wheelsandtires

Z

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 346). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe taught-in reference values. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 351). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 346).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 252).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 145).


X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the Service menu.

X Press thea button.


X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activemessage is shown instead of the tire pressuredisplay. The tire pressures are already beingmonitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in themultifunction display,the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.The tire pressure must be corrected when theopportunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 252).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressure as the reference values

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also set referencevalues manually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 346).You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 346).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.



X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure for each wheel orthe Tire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes messagewill be displayed in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 351

Wheelsandtires

Z

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressureloss warning system monitors the set tire pres-sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.This enables the system to detect significantpressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation ofa wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,a corresponding warningmessage will appear inthe multifunction display.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarningby the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears inthe Service menu of the multifunction display.Information on the message display can befound in the "Restarting the tire pressure losswarning system" section (Y page 352).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does not warnyou of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 346).The tire pressure loss warning does not replacethe need to regularly check the tire pressure. Aneven loss of pressure on several tires at thesame time cannot be detected by the tire pres-sure loss warning system.The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.

The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-ing at high speeds or driving with high rates ofacceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-cle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning system ifyou have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tires forthe respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side. Addition-ally, a tire pressure table is attached to thefuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warningsystem can only give reliable warnings if youhave set the correct tire pressure. If an incor-rect tire pressure is set, these incorrect val-ues will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 346).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 145).



X Press thea button.X Press9 or: to select Tire Pres‐sure.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress'OK' to Restart message appears in themultifunction display.


If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press9 or: to select Yes.X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressure losswarning system will monitor the set tire pres-sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, select Cancel by pressing9or:.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of the

vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.

Loading the vehicle 353

Wheelsandtires

Z

You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 353).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Example 1Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 2- Rear: 3

354 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

RWeight of the occupants- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)- Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)- Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)- Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)- Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 1- Rear: 2RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)- Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg)- Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

Example 3Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2RDistribution of the occupants:

- Front: 1RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Loading the vehicle 355

Wheelsandtires

Z

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 353).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mumpermissible load that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government test track as a tire graded100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

356 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 344). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 345).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 360)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 360)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 359)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 348)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 360)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 357)D Load index (Y page 359)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

All about wheels and tires 357

Wheelsandtires

Z

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the sizeratio between the tire height and tire width andis shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code:tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the sizedescription, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).

Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 353).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 359).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 359).Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,


ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR",and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 367).

Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. You will find this after the letter thatidentifies the speed rating (Y page 357).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure


Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissible

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.


Wheelsandtires

Z

load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 353).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 367).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four represent

the year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked with "3208", was manufactured inweek 32 in 2008.


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturer


following specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,

fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.


Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 327) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 328).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

362 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 363).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotate every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depend-ing on the degree of tire wear. Do not change thedirection of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,restart the tire pressure loss warning system(Y page 352) or the tire pressure monitor(Y page 351).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor-mal" for AIRMATIC (Y page 182) or ActiveBody Control (ABC) (Y page 180).

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock(Y page 145).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Make sure that the engine cannot be startedvia your smartphone (Y page 147).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 327).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

Changing a wheel 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On a

slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RDo not place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with AMGwheels and hub caps: thehub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you canunscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove thehub cap. Two different variants can be installed.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastic hubcaps:X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure that hubcap: is in the open position. To do this, turnthe center cover counter-clockwise.

X Position hub cap: and turn the center coverclockwise until hub cap: engages physicallyand audibly.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.


Vehicles with AMG wheels and aluminumhub caps:X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 327).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Position lug wrench= on socket;.X Using lug wrench=, turn hub cap: coun-ter-clockwise and remove it.

X To install: before installing, check hub cap:and the wheel area for soiling and clean ifnecessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it is inthe right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tightenedto the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap installed at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of thejack so that the letters AUF are visible.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles withAMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body,the vehicle has covers installed next to the jack-ing points on the outer sills.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: fold cover?upwards.

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

Changing a wheel 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA and the baseof the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until the tire is raiseda maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 362).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: during removaland repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc and dam-age it. Therefore, you should proceed care-fully and get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second alignmentbolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.


X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi-ble.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft(150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicleswith AMG equipment: insert the cover intothe outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 346).

i Vehicles with a tire pressure controlsystem: all mounted wheels must be equip-ped with functioning sensors for the tire pres-sure monitor.

Wheel-tire combination

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.

Wheel-tire combination 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 346).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rwith the same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 328).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

368 Wheel-tire combinationWheelsandtires

Information regarding technical data

Hybrid vehicles: make sure that you read theseparate operating instructions. Otherwise, youmay not recognize dangers.

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible outputin these wavebands.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions (example:Mercedes‑Maybach): Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender? Trunk lidOn vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the frontor rear roof area is not permitted.On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-est to the center of the road.Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Vehicle electronics 369

Technicaldata

Z

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 78 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and amaximum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio system/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There are no restrictions when positioning theantenna on the outside of the vehicle for thefollowing wavebands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

Location of vehicle identification plate (exam-ple, left-hand-drive vehicle)X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only): VIN; Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only): VIN; Paint code

370 Identification platesTechnicaldata

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviatefrom the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 371)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 370)

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci-ties


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must match.You should therefore only use products thathave been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can identify service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions onthe container:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Service products and filling capacities 371

Technicaldata

Z

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

All models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-age to the fuel system, engine and exhaustsystem.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.

372 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 159).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixedwith the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 371).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.


Technicaldata

Z

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

S 400 4MATIC 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

S 600Mercedes-May-bach S 600Mercedes‑AMGS 65

11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

Mercedes‑AMGS 63 4MATIC

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 371).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible forthe following:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).

374 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewithMB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

S 600Mercedes‑May-bach S 600

15.7 US qt (14.9 l)

S 400 4MATICMercedes‑AMGS 63 4MATIC

13.0 US qt (12.3 l)

Mercedes‑AMGS 65

16.1 US qt (15.2 l)

All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

Windshield washer system


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. The

spray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,must be adhered to.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.


Technicaldata

Z

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbols: indicate:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

Vehicles without rear-com-partment air-conditioningsystem

Capacity

Refrigerant 23.3 ± 0.4 oz(660 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 3.9 oz(110 g)

Vehicles with rear-com-partment air-conditioningsystem

Capacity

Refrigerant 27.1 ± 0.4 oz(770 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Trunk lid opening dimensions (example:Mercedes‑Maybach)Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model : Opening height

S 550S 550 4MATIC

71.0 in(1803 mm)

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles

71.2 in(1808 mm)

All other models 71.1 in(1806 mm)

376 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

S-Class with a short wheelbase

All models

Vehicle length 201.4 in (5116 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1499 mm)

Wheelbase 119.5 in (3035 mm)

Turning radius 39.0 ft (11.90 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

S-Class with a long wheelbase

Mercedes‑AMGvehicles



83.9 in (2130 mm)



Turning circle,Mercedes-AMGS634MATIC

41.0 ft (12.50 m)

Turning circle,Mercedes‑AMG S 65

40.4 ft (12.30 m)


Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

All other models



83.9 in (2130 mm)


All other models



Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle height

S 550S 550 4MATIC

58.8 in (1494 mm)

S 600 58.9 in (1497 mm)

Mercedes‑Maybach

All models




83.9 in (2130 mm)



Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle data 377

Technicaldata

Z

s-class - mercedes-benz usa€¦ · s-class operator'smanual orderno.p222001313...

Documents